Product introduction

PLC is a versatile high-performance programmable logic

controller, which is widely used in plastics, packaging, textiles, food,

medical, pharmaceutical, environmental, municipal, printing, building

materials, elevators, central air conditioning, numerical control

machine tools and other fields of systems and control equipment. In

addition to its own various peripheral interfaces (digital input, digital

output, analog input, analog output, high-speed counter, high-speed

pulse output channels, power supply, communication ports, etc.), it

can also extend all types of extension modules for flexible

configuration.

PLC programming software is a programming software which is in

accordance with IEC 61131-3 standard. It can be used for PLC

programming. Furthermore, it supports three kinds of programming

languages--LD (Ladder Diagram), FBD (Function Block Diagram) and

IL (Instruction List). It can run on the systems of Win98, Win200X,

WinXP, Win7, Win8 and the later versions.

PLC features
Ethernet + : Host PLC and remote modules support Ethernet

communication, host PLC support Ethernet port and 5 other

RS232/RS485 communication ports working simultaniously,support

N:N network type,support remote programming,debug, monitoring

and data exchange. Easy to network with other PLC modules,HMI

and PC via Ethernet port.

The firmware upgrade function: Taking the lead in the function of

realizing firmware upgrade in a small programmable controller. You

can upgrade the system firmware through the firmware upgrade

function free,therefore you bought the products previously can also

have new features.

Rich network communication function: CPU host built two

communication ports, which can be expandable to five

communication ports, each port can be programmed and connects to

network, and all of them can be used as masters or slaves. It can

support 1: N, N: 1, N: N networking and a variety of man-machine

interface and configuration software. It can also connect to network

with any third-party devices which have communication capabilities

(such as inverters, instruments, barcode readers, etc.).

Supporting for multiple communication protocols: It has internally

installed Modbus RTU / ASCII protocol, Modbus TCP protocol,

freedom communication protocol and the Billbus, Billbus TCP high-

speed communication protocols to the most convenient

communication instruction system, no matter what kind of

communication protocols, it only simply needs a communication

instruction when dealing with complex communication functions.You

will no longer troubled by the problems, such as communications

port’s conflicts, sending and receiving control, communications

interrupt handling issues and you can use a variety of protocols to

exchange data easily by mixing them up in the program.

High-speed pulse counting function: Supports 8-channel duplex

high-speed (200KHz) pulse counting, counting mode supports 7 kinds

(pulse / direction 1 octave, pulse / direction 2 octave, forward /

reverse pulse 1 octave, forward / reverse pulse 2 octave, A / B phase

pulse 1 octave, A / B phase pulse 2 octave, A / B phase pulse 4

octave), and three kinds of comparisons (single-stage comparison,

the absolute mode comparison, the relative mode comparision),

supports 8 segments comparision fixed value, with self-learning

function.
High-speed pulse frequency measurement: Supports 16-channel

(200KHz) high-speed pulse frequency measurement, support the

ways of time or pulses to measure the frequency

High-speed pulse output: Supports 8-channel duplex high-speed

(200KHz) pulse output, support for acceleration and deceleration

pulse output, multi-segment envelope pulse output function, a unique

sync pulse output function makes it easy to achieve precise

synchronization control. Stand-alone support 16-channel pulse width

modulation (PWM), can drive 16 servo or stepper motors.

Motion control function: Each model support for 8-

channel(200KHZ) motion control, supports arbitrary 2-channel linear

interpolation, circular interpolation, support follower pulse output,

absolute address, relative address, backlash compensation, original

point return, definition of electrical origin.

Edge capture and interrupts: CPU supports 8-channel up and down

along the catch and interrupt functions, all digital inputs support signal
filtering settings, all digital outputs remains set to support power
output. Provide 52 real-time interrupt.
0. Powerful analog processing function: AI register accesses the
analog input directly, analog input support engineering conversion,
sampling frequency settings, and zero correction. Available AQ
registers control the analog output directly, analog output support
engineering conversion and can be configured to maintain output.

1. Strong password protection function: Three levels of password

protection function (program files password, each block password,
PLC hardware password) and prohibits the application to upload.

2. Self-diagnostic function, power failure protection function,

calendar (RTC), floating point operations, etc.

Programming software features

1. Internal PLC simulator: PLC programming software realize
the PLC program run in the simulation. During programming or
the programming is completed, you can run PLC program in the
simulation without online to check the program execution is
correct or not. It can reduce on-site commissioning time greatly,
reduce debugging difficult and improve debugging efficiency.
2. Communications simulator: It is used to the debug
communication instruction simulation tools. It can be manually
input simulately response message returned from salve, or you
can use the computer's serial port to communicate with salve
really, Simulate the process that PLC executes communication
instruction really and process the return data from the salve.
3. Interpolation simulator: Track and draw the trajectory
generated from motion control instructions such as the linear
interpolation, circular interpolation, listing parameters of the
pulse output channel of the motive plane and corresponding to
each axis, display the current position of the channel, the
mechanical home position, output mode, you can set shaft
length, unit pulses.
4. Function of generate PLC executable file: PLC program
can be generated to executable file which is released and
executed independently. So you do not need to send the PLC
program to the user, it can be very easy, very safe to put the
PLC excutable file to the user to download, but do not worry the
user would can see the program content.
5. Facilitate innovation instruction set: On the basis of
analysis and absorption of various PLC instruction, PLC
launched many powerful innovations facilitate instruction. As
communication instruction (COMM, MODR, MODW, HWRD,
HWWR), data portfolio diversification instruction (BUNB, BUNW,
WUNW, BDIB, WDIB, WDIW), PID control (PID), valve control
(VC), upper and lower alarm (HAL , LAL), range transmitter
(SC), temperature curve (TTC) ,etc. Any one instruction can
realize the function but other PLC required to multiple
instructions. These instructions are very easy to understand and
use, greatly improve the programming efficiency and running
speed.
6. Modular project structure: Create 31 blocks total (main
program, sub program, interrupt program) and chose any
programming language to program. The execution order of
block can be adjusted at random. Each block can be imported
and exported independently and has the same password
protected of program projects.So we can fully realize the
modular programming and program reuse dreams.
7. Instruction using table: Provides multiple instruction tables.
Use these tables can reduce the amount of programs, saving
program space, such as initialization data. Each table can be
imported and exported independently and has the same
password protection of program project.
8. Powerful online features: Search out all the PLC that
connect with the PC. Show running status, fault status, RUN /
STOP switch position, hardware configuration information,
communication port parameters such detailed information of all
the online PLC. Select any PLC for online monitoring, program
download, firmware upgrade, controlling PLC stop, adjusting
PLC real-time clock, modifying password protection, modifying
communication port parameters, modifying the watching-dog
time and PLC station names.
9. Online monitoring and debugging functions: Provide 10
pages of component’s monitoring table. It can choose in
decimal, hexadecimal, binary, floating point and character to
display data. Support component and register component
monitoring hybridly and displaying component annotation at the
same time. All instruction tables can be imported to the
monitoring table.
10. Unique real-time curve function: Monitor any register
component for real-time curve to debug process-control
facilitately.
11. Humane input: Provide shortcuts, drag and drop, click and
many other command input. Suggest effective components or
range of values for each input and output terminals. It can be
entered directly. Some data of combination (such as
communication protocols etc.) can also double-click the
instruction to configure the input data.
12. Convenient annotation:Provide the component comment,
network comment, instruction comment, block comment, table
comment, and project comment. After the component with "//" to
input comments directly (eg: X0 // motor start). Comments can
choose to download to the PLC for reading or modification
facilitately.
13. Detailed tips and online help: Provide PLC resource
window, instruction window, etc. All the instructions and detailed
description of hardware modules can be found in powerful
online help system which is open through clicking F1 key in the
programming interface to find the answer. Even if use PLC
programming software for the first time who can easily complete
the preparation of control program.
14. Convenient editing functions: Support all conventional
editing operations, searching and replacing, instruction up and
down, network up and down, copying and pasting between
program projects.
15. Hardware configuration, sub program parameter
passing, local components, indirection, print, preview,
debugging, CRC calculation, password protection, etc.
Quick start
This section brief introduce general step of programming PLC control

program , to help beginner as soon as possible know well PLC

programming software programming operation.

General step of programming

First step:double click the programming software icon at computer

desktop ,start programming software.

Second step: new construction a program project, use menu[ file/

new construction program project ],open " new construction program

project" window, select PLC series. PLC MPU and others project

attribute .

Third step: write control program ,build one or many program block,

use menu [File/New....../master program block],open " New

construction program block" window ,input the program block named .

select programming language (LD. FBD. IL)and program block type

(program block. subprogram. interrupt program).

Fourth step: if need configuration hardware parameter or extend

module ,Use menu [ Look UP/PLC hardware configuration ] open "PLC

hardware configuration " window.

 Fifth step: Start simulator,off line simulate running debug program,

running correct then next step, otherwise return to third step modify

program .

Sixth step: Online with PLC.

Seventh step :download program to PLC.

Eighth step :start PLC running.

First step:Start programming software
double click the programming software icon at computer desktop

,start programming software ,as follows:

Second step:New project
Open mode :A. Click menu [File /New project ],B. Click tools bar

button ,C. use shortcut key Ctrl+N.

"New project " window as follow:

At "PLC series" among pull listing select "PLC series".

At "CPU type " among pull listing select "CPU also MPU type".

Power-off preserve area may be defined by user, may be set V. M. S. T.

C five type component power-off preserve area start component and

length. System default the Power-off preserve area listing as follow:

 Component Power-off Component
type preserve area number

V V1000~V2047 1048

M M1536~M2047 512

S S156~S255 100

T T96~T127 32

C C64~C127 64

At " project name " input new project name, the project name will be

display in the main frames of the project manager .

At "user name". "designer". "version". "company" etc. columns input

relate to information.

If need password protect the new project, then at "password" and "verify

password" input the password.

At "note" may be input relate to note information of the project.

Third step:Write control program

 Control program realize the kernel of automatic control ,it essence is

according to control object ( as machine. automatic equipment.

production line etc. ) requirement details use programming software

supplied many instructions realize automatic control of the control object.

According to the need build one or more program block, choice oneself

well-informed program language (LD. FBD. IL), each block may be set

alone password , realize local cypher function.

At program block use programming software supplied many instructions

to program , realize all kinds of control logical and arithmetic.

After complete the program, save program file, start simulator running,

debug program whether attain the control requirement.

Detail operation refer to "programming operation manual "

[Example]
Below explain how to write the control program via the example,
the example control requirement: press X0 button start, delay 2 second
output Y0. press X1 button stop.
[Example program]
 [Example program operation]

Create a new " Quick start example" main program block, open mode:A.

Click menu [File/New....../Main program block],B. Click tools bar

button "Main program block"." Create new program block " window as

follow.
Click tool bar button or press F9 shortcut key add a switch, input

switch component "X0//start" (behind "//" " start " is the comment of

component X0 ,the same below), press Ctrl+3 shortcut key change

normal open to rising edge.

Press F10 shortcut key parallel a switch, input switch component

"M0//self-lock"

Move cursor to the right side of X0 switch ,press F9 shortcut key series a

switch, input switch component "X1//stop", press Ctrl+2 shortcut key

change normal open to normal close.

Move cursor right, input "TON" return, add one "TON" instruction,

continuous press enter, when input box at "Pt" item input set value 2 of

the timer.

Press F11 shortcut key add parallel output instruction "OUT", input

component "M0".

Press tool bar button or press Ctrl+L shortcut key add a new

network.
Press F9 shortcut key add a switch, input switch component "T0//delay

2S".

Press F11 shortcut key add output instruction "OUT", input component

"Y0//output".

Come here program wrote complete. press Ctrl+S shortcut key to

save the program file, may be start the simulator executing, debug

program whether attain control requirement .

Fourth step:PLC hardware configure

If you need configure hardware parameter (as configure AI input

channel signal type . quantities etc. ) or need add extend module etc.

relate to hardware, then do this step, otherwise skip this step .

Double click " Project manager " window directory tree "PLC hardware

configure " point or use menu [Check/PLC hardware configure] to open

"PLC hardware configure" window.

Click open "Project manager" window directory tree " PLC ,select want

to add module , use mouse drag the module to right side hardware

configure list.
Click hardware configure list module ,under the list will display the

attribute of the module be defined and configured.

Define and configure the attribute of each module.

Detail operation refer to "PLC hardware configure ".

Fifth step:Off line simulate debug

During write the program or after complete the program , may be use

simulator under the condition of completely off line PLC simulate running

PLC program, use for check program executed whether correct, vastly

reduce local debug time ,reduce debug difficulty, improve debug

efficiency.

Click menu [Debug/Start simulator]or click tools bar button start the

simulator, system will automatic compile the current program project.

Detail operation of the simulator refer to "Simulate and on line debug".

If compile the program error, simulator can not running, user must modify

the program according to the compiler suggestive error information.

Compile no error or only alarm, then start simulator .simulator interface

as follows:
Double click program "X0" switch force X0=ON, then M0=ON self lock,

timer T0 start timing, when TV0=2 time time to then T0=ON,Y0=ON.

Double click program "X1"switch force X1=ON,X1 normal close switch no

electricity, then M0=OFF,T0=OFF,Y0=OFF.

Via the simulator running verify, program running result correct.

Sixth step:Online with PLC

Connect to one or many PLC in the network . Only after PLC online

may be control operation the PLC, such as: upload or download etc..

Click menu [PLC/PLC networking] or click tool bar button , open "PLC

online" window.
Click "Online" button (general condition, direct use default parameter ),

already online PLC will automatic add to the listing box, now click "exit "

close the window.

PLC online and parameter setting refer to "Online control PLC" section

"PLC online".

Seventh step:Download program

Download current program project (hardware configure and program

etc. content) to online PLC. Before download system automatic compile

the current program project, if error during compile, then list all errors,

after user modify the program no any error then can be downloaded.

Click menu [PLC/PLC program download] or click tool bar button

, open "PLC program download" window, click "download " button

download the program to PLC.

Note: detail operation refer to " Online control PLC" section

"Download program".

Eighth step:Start PLC

After download complete, if PLC already in running status (RUN

indicator go on), may skip the step. Otherwise turn the PLC running

switch in to "RUN" position.

PLC Register and Data

Overview
PLC have configurated many component in the system (also call: variable. address),as:X. Y.

M. AI. AQ. V etc..Components have Bit register and Word register,bit register occupy one bit

express boolean variables ,word register occupy one word (16 bits,2 bytes) express data

variables,they can be used again and again in program.In PLC use the soft component to

operated in the program for arithmetic and control function.

Data

1. Data type

Data type Explain Data length Range

BOOL bit 1 bit component 1(ON). 0(OFF)

16 bits,1 register
INT integer with sign ﹣32768~32767
component

long integer with 32 bits,2 register

DINT ﹣2147483648~2147483647
sign components

32bits,2 register
REAL floating point ﹣3.402823e+38~3.402823e+38
components

CHAR character string 1 character occupy one byte

2. Component matching data type

Data type Component type

BOOL X Y T C M SM LM S

INT constant AI AQ TV CV V LV SV P

DINT constant TV CV V LV SV

REAL constant V LV
 CHAR constant V LV

3. Constant

Constant type Example Valid range Declare

16 bits integer with sign 1234. -7890 -32768~32767

32 bits integer with sign 12345678. -9876543 -2147483648~2147483647

16 bits constant in
0x2EF8. 0x9A12 0x0~0xFFFF
hexadecimal

32 bits constant in
0xA76DCFE9 0x0~0xFFFFFFFF
hexadecimal

floating point constant accord with IEEE-

3.1415926. -0.02341 -3.402823e+38~3.402823e+38
in single precision 754

4. Storage and use for 32 bits data

1. The storage pattern in the register of 32 bits data :the data type of DINT. REAL are 32 bits

length,but one register occupy 16 bits length,so need 2 continuous address registers for

store 32 bits data.When store 32 bits data,according to fist low word. after high word

,e..g.:32 bits long integer data 0xA76DCFE9 store in V0V1 registers,then 0xCFE9 stored in

V0,0xA76D stored in V1.

2. Register component can stored integer. long integer,if the operands in instructions is

register,then the component is 16 bits integer. 32 bits long integer or floating point,is

according the data type of the operand in the instruction.e.g.:"MOV -23, V10",the MOV is 16

bits integer move instruction,the register V10 is a 16 bits integer;"D.MOV 7891223, V10",the

D.MOV is 32 bits integer move instruction,the register V10 is a 32 bits long integer (occupy

V10V11);"FMOV -9.223, V10",the FMOV is floating point move instruction,the register V10 is

a floating point (occupy V10V11).

3. The operand of floating point instruction is floating point,the operand of other instruction is

integer(16 bits integer,32 bits long integer),data type converted with convert instruction.
Component overview
1. PLC bit component

Component Name Range Read/Write attribute Declare

X
External input X0~X1023 read
relay

Y External output relay Y0~Y1023 read/write

default power-off preserve:M1536~M2047,512

M Auxiliary relay M0~M12287 read/write
point

time base of T0~T251. T256~T1023 can be set

10ms. 100ms. 1s
T Timer T0~T1023 read/write
default power-off preserve:T96~T127,32 point

time base of T252~T255 is 1ms

default power-off preserve:C64~C127,64 point

C Counter C0~C255 read/write

System status bit SM0~SM215 all be read/some be

SM
wrote

S Step relay S0~S2047 read/write default power-off preserve:S156~S255,100 point

LM0~LM31 function in local area (program block. sub

LM Local relay read/write
program. interrupt program)

2. PLC register component

Component Name Rang Read/Write attribute Declare

AI
Analog input register AI0~AI255 read

AQ
Analog output register AQ0~AQ255 read/write

V default power-off preserve:V1000~V2047,1048

Internal data register V0~V14847 read/write
point

time base of T0~T251. T256~T1023 can be set

10ms. 100ms. 1s
TV Current value of timer
TV0~TV1023 read/write
default power-off preserve:TV96~TV127,32 point

time base of T252~T255 is1ms

the CV register is a 16 bits register,in CV48~CV79

CV Current value of counter register are 32 bits register,default power-off

CV0~CV255 read/write
preserve:CV64~CV127 ,64 point
 Component Name Rang Read/Write attribute Declare

SV0~SV1
SV System register all be read/some be

54 wrote

LV Local register LV0~LV31 function in local area (program block. sub

read/write
program. interrupt program)

Indexed addressing
P P0~P29 special register use in indexed addressing
point read/write

Note:power-off preserve range of T(TV). C(CV). M. S. V in the table are default configure of the

system,the range can be changed by user.

External input relay [X]

External input relay X:Corresponds to external input points(e.g.:Switch. Button etc.), attain the

external input point state (ON or OFF) access to PLC.

Sign by X,e.g.:X0. X1. … X8. X10. X11. …. Identifiered from X0,In "PLC hardware configure" to

configure.Automatic assign the address by the system.

External output relay [Y]

External output relay Y:Corresponds to external output points,use for drive the external output

points Y ON-OFF (ON or OFF).One Y relay can be reuse of output in the program ,but

recommendation use only once, in order to improve the reliability and readability of the program.

Sign by Y,e.g.:Y0. Y1. … Y8. Y10. Y11. ….Identifiered from Y0,In "PLC hardware configure" to

configure.Automatic assign the address by the system.

Timer [T]
Timer T:each timer compose output relay T and current value TV.

Target = time base * set value.Time base of T0~T251. T256~T1023 can be set 10ms. 100ms.

1s,time base of T252~T255 is 1ms.

In one program,each timer can be used only once,But the output relay T and current value TV

of the same No.can be used unlimited.

 Timer can be devided power-off preserve and no power-off preserve:the output relay T and

current value TV of the no power-off preserve timer will be reset when PLC STOP .The output

relay T and current value TV of the power-off preserve timer will be retain when PLC STOP.

Counter[C]
Counter C:each counter compose output relay C and current value CV.

In one program,each counter can be used only once,But the output relay C and current value

CV of the same No.can be used unlimited.

Counter can be devided 16 bits counter and 32 bits counter, among CV48~CV79 are 32 bits

counter,rest are 16 bits counter.

Counter can be devided three type in accordance with the count mode:increase count CTU.

decrease count CTD. increase/decrease count CTUD.

Counter can be devided power-off preserve and no power-off preserve :the output relay C

and current value CV of the no power-off preserve counter will be reset when PLC STOP .The

output relay C and current value CV of the power-off preserve counter will be retain when PLC

STOP.

Auxiliary relay[M]
Auxiliary relay M:Used for internal logic operation,we can use the combination of auxiliary

relays in control logic,but can not drive the load direct.

M can be devided power-off preserve and no power-off preserve :the state of no power-off

preserve M will be reset when PLC STOP .The state of power-off preserve M will be retain when

PLC STOP.

Step relay[S]
Step relay S:Used for step control instruction,each step relay stand for one step,can be used

the same as auxiliary relay if there is not step instruction in the program .

S can be devided power-off preserve and no power-off preserve :the state of no power-off

preserve S will be reset when PLC STOP .The state of power-off preserve S will be retain when
PLC STOP.

System status bit [SM]

System status bit SM is a group of special internal relay of the system,can be used unlimited in

the program, each SM has a special function.

See detail "SM System status bit"

Local relay [LM]

Local relay LM:they are special internal relay which function in local area (program block. sub

program. interrupt program) ,different with the internal relay M.

The function range of M:in the all program in the project,all of the scan cycle.

The function range of LM:in local area (program block. sub program. interrupt program) ,state

(ON/OFF) only keep one scan cycle ,state will be reset when the next scan cycle started,state

reset to OFF,general use for temporary variable or the parameter of the program block be called.

Analog input register [AI]

Analog input register AI:each analog input channel corresponding one analog input register

AI,analog input channel connect to external device,used for measure the continuous change of

the external singal ,e.g. temperature . pressure. quantity of flow etc..

When the signal of external analog input channel be changed,can be reflect to the analog

input register AI immediately.

The signal type. quantities. up and down rang of quantities of each analog input channel can

be configured in "PLC hardware configure".Automatic assign the address by the system.

Analog output register [AQ]

Analog output register AQ:each analog output channel corresponding one analog output

register AQ,analog output channel connect to external device.

When the value of analog output register AQ be changed, corresponding the signal of the

analog output channel be changed immediately.

 The signal type. quantities. up and down rang of quantities of each analog output channel can

be configured in "PLC hardware configure".Automatic assign the address by the system.

Current value of timer [TV]

Current value of timer TV: indicate the keep time of the timer.

See detail "Timer T"

Current value of counter [CV]

Current value of counter CV:indicate the current count of the counter.

See detail "Counter C"

Internal data register [V]

Internal data register V:for store data ,16 bits register(b0~b15),integer can express the range

-32768~+32767,2 continuous 16 bits register is 32 bits register,long integer can express the range

-2147483648~+2147483647,float point can express the range -3.402823e+38~3.402823e+38.

V can be devided power-off preserve and no power-off preserve :the value of no power-off

preserve V will be reset to 0 when PLC STOP .The value of power-off preserve V will be retain

when PLC STOP.

System register [SV]

System special register SV is a group of special internal register of the system,can be used

unlimited in the program, each SV has a special function.

See detail "SV system register"

Local register [LV]

Local reggister LV:they are special internal register which special function in local area

(program block. sub program. interrupt program) ,not the same as internal register V.
 The function range of V:in the all program in the project ,all of the scan cycle.

The function range of LV:in local area (program block. sub program. interrupt program) ,value

only keep one scan cycle ,value will be reset to 0 when the next scan cycle started,general use

for temporary variable or the parameter of the program block be called.

Indexed addressing point [P]

Indexed addressing point P:special register use in indexed addressing .

How to input the register indexed and representation in the program:base address of the

register+indexed addressing point P.e.g.:V100P6 presentation the base address is V100,use the

value of P6 as excursion value for indexed addressing,as if the value of P6 is 10,indicate access

the register is V110.

Reality access register =base address of the register + excursion of indexed address point.

Note:

1. When indexed addressing use the P,If base address of the register + excursion of indexed

address point (reality access register )exceed the uplimit ,it will be error of the indexed addressing

instruction,the instruction cannot be execute.

2. LM, LV, S, P component type does not support indexing

3. Part of the instruction does not support indexing:RESH. HHSC. HCWR. SPD. PWM. PLSY.

PLSR. ZRN. SETZ. PPMR. CIMR. SPLS. SYNP. COMM. MODR. MODW. HWRD. HWWR. RCV.

XMT. SORT. ENO

PLC instruction set

PLC have a set of abundance high-efficiency instruction system, depend on absorb

instructions of others PLC , support up to 200 application instructions , among there are

many powerful innovate easy instructions .as commucation instructions (COMM.

MODR. MODW. HWRD. HWWR). character conversion instructions (ITOC. CTOI.

FTOC. CTOF). data combination disperse instructions (BUNB. BUNW. WUNW. BDIB.

WDIB. WDIW). bound alarm instructions(HAL. LAL). valve control instructions(VC).

temperature curve(TTC) etc.

Instruction set table as follows:

Support
Instruction Instruction 32 bit language
8 bit model Instruction function
type name model
LD FBD IL
Compare
switch LB.= Equal to compare switch ,have 16 bit/32
= D.= √
HB.= bit /low byte/high byte model

LB.<> HB. Unequal to compare switch ,have 16 √

<> D.<>
<> bit/32 bit /low byte/high byte model

LB.> Greater than compare switch ,have 16 √

> D.>
HB.> bit/32 bit /low byte/high byte model

Great than or equal to compare switch

LB.>= √
>= D.>= ,have 16 bit/32 bit /low byte/high byte
HB.>=
model

LB.< HB. Less than compare switch ,have 16 bit/32 √

< D.<
< bit /low byte/high byte model

Less than or equal to compare switch

LB.<= HB. √
<= D.<= ,have 16 bit/32 bit /low byte/high byte
<=
model

Floating-point number equal to compare

F.= √
switch

Floating-point number unequal to

F.<> √
compare switch
 Support
Instruction Instruction 32 bit language
8 bit model Instruction function
type name model
LD FBD IL

Floating-point number greater than

F.> √
compare switch

Floating-point number greater than or

F.>= √
equal to compare switch

Floating-point number less than compare

F.< √
switch

Floating-point number less than or equal

F.<= √
to compare switch

STL Step start √

Step instruction SFROM Step combine √

STO Step jump √

AND Logic AND √ √

OR Logic OR √ √

XOR Logic XOR √ √

OUT Coil output √ √ √

Bit instruction SET Setting √ √ √

RST Reset √ √ √

ALT ON/OFF alternately output √ √ √

ZRST Batch reset √ √ √

ENO Get ENO output √

 Support
Instruction Instruction 32 bit language
8 bit model Instruction function
type name model
LD FBD IL

TON Delay ON √ √ √

Timer TOF Delay OFF √ √ √

TP Pulse timer √ √ √

CTU D.CTU Increase counter √ √ √

Counter CTD D.CTD Decrease counter √ √ √

CTUD D.CTUD Increase and Decrease counter √ √ √

High speed
control SHC Single high speed counter √ √ √
instruction

RESH IO refresh √ √ √

HHSC High speed counter √ √ √

HCWR Write high speed counter √ √ √

SPD Speed detection √ √ √

PWM Pulse width modulation √ √ √

PLSY D.PLSY Pulse output √ √ √

PLSR D.PLSR Accelerate and decelerate pulse output √ √ √

ZRN Origin point return √ √ √

SETZ Set electric origin point √ √ √

 Support
Instruction Instruction 32 bit language
8 bit model Instruction function
type name model
LD FBD IL

PPMR Linear interpolation √ √ √

CIMR Circular interpolation √ √ √

SPLS Single pulse output √ √ √

SYNP Synchronization pulse output √ √ √

PSTOP Stop pulse output √ √ √

CMP D.CMP Compare instruction √ √ √

ZCP D.ZCP Regional comparison √ √ √

MATC D.MATC Numerical match √ √ √

ABSC D.ABSC Absolute cam comparison √ √ √

BON ON bit determine √ √ √

Compare
instruction
BONC D.BONC ON bit numbers √ √ √

MAX D.MAX Maximum √ √ √

MIN D.MIN Minimum √ √ √

SEL D.SEL Selection of conditions √ √ √

MUX D.MUX Multi-choice √ √ √

Shift instruction
LBST Low byte evaluation √ √ √
 Support
Instruction Instruction 32 bit language
8 bit model Instruction function
type name model
LD FBD IL

HBST High byte evaluation √ √ √

MOV D.MOV Move √ √ √

BMOV Block move √ √ √

FILL Fill √ √ √

XCH Byte swap √ √ √

BXCH Block swap √ √ √

SHL Bit left shift √ √ √

SHR Bit right shift √ √ √

WSHL Word left shift √ √ √

WSHR Word right shift √ √ √

ROL Bit rotate left shift √ √ √

ROR Bit rotate right shift √ √ √

WROL Word rotate left shift √ √ √

WROR Word rotate right shift √ √ √

BSHL Byte left shift √ √ √

BSHR Byte right shift √ √ √

 Support
Instruction Instruction 32 bit language
8 bit model Instruction function
type name model
LD FBD IL

ATBL Append to array √ √ √

FIFO First in first out √ √ √

LIFO Last in first out √ √ √

SORT Data sort √ √ √

Data
conversion ENCO Encoder √ √ √
instruction

DECO Decoder √ √ √

BTOW Bit convert to word √ √ √

WTOB Word convert to bit √ √ √

HEX HEX.LB ASCII convert to hexadecimal √ √ √

ASCI ASCI.LB Hexadecimal convert to ASCII √ √ √

BUNB Discrete bit combination to continuous bit √ √ √

Discrete bit combination to continuous

BUNW √ √ √
word

Discrete word combination to continuous

WUNW √ √ √
word

BDIB Continuous bit disperse to discrete bit √ √ √

WDIB Continuous word disperse to discrete bit √ √ √

 Support
Instruction Instruction 32 bit language
8 bit model Instruction function
type name model
LD FBD IL

Continuous word disperse to discrete

WDIW √ √ √
word

BCD D.BCD BIN convert to BCD √ √ √

BIN D.BIN BCD convert to BIN √ √ √

ITOL Integer convert to long integer √ √ √

GRAY BIN convert to GRAY code √ √ √

GBIN GRAY code convert to BIN √ √ √

GHLB Obtain high low byte √ √ √

GETB Capture byte string √ √ √

BCMP BCMP.LB Byte string comparison √ √ √

Character ITOC D.ITOC Integer convert to character √ √ √

instruction

CTOI Character convert to integer √ √ √

FTOC Floating point convert to character √ √ √

CTOF Character convert to floating point √ √ √

Arithmetical
instruction WNOT D.WNOT Negation √ √ √

WAND D.WAND AND operation √ √ √

WOR D.WOR OR operation √ √ √

 Support
Instruction Instruction 32 bit language
8 bit model Instruction function
type name model
LD FBD IL

WXOR D.WXOR XOR operation √ √ √

ADD D.ADD Addition √ √ √

SUB D.SUB Subtraction √ √ √

INC D.INC Increase 1 √ √ √

DEC D.DEC Decrease 1 √ √ √

MUL D.MUL Multiplication √ √ √

DIV D.DIV Division √ √ √

ACCU D.ACCU Accumulation √ √ √

AVG D.AVG Average √ √ √

ABS D.ABS Absolute value √ √ √

NEG D.NEG Two's complement √ √ √

Floating point
instruction FCMP Floating point comparison √ √ √

FZCP Floating point regional comparison √ √ √

FMOV Floating point move instruction √ √ √

FADD Floating point addition √ √ √

FSUB Floating point subtraction √ √ √

 Support
Instruction Instruction 32 bit language
8 bit model Instruction function
type name model
LD FBD IL

FMUL Floating point multiplication √ √ √

FDIV Floating point division √ √ √

FACCU Floating point accumulation √ √ √

FAVG Floating point average √ √ √

FMAX Floating point maximum √ √ √

FMIN Floating point minimum √ √ √

FTOI Floating point convert to integer √ √ √

ITOF D.ITOF Integer convert to floating point √ √ √

FABS Floating point absolute √ √ √

FSQR Floating point square root √ √ √

FSIN Sine √ √ √

FCOS Cosine √ √ √

FTAN Tangent √ √ √

FASIN Arcsine √ √ √

FACOS Arc cosine √ √ √

FATAN Arctangent √ √ √
 Support
Instruction Instruction 32 bit language
8 bit model Instruction function
type name model
LD FBD IL

FLN Natural logarithm √ √ √

FLOG The base-10 logarithm of a number √ √ √

FEXP Nature exponential √ √ √

FRAD Angle convert to radian √ √ √

FDEG Radian convert to angle √ √ √

FXY Exponent √ √ √

TCMP Real time clock comparison √ √ √

TACCU Time accumulative total √ √ √

SCLK Setup system clock √ √ √

Clock
instruction
TIME Time switch √ √ √

DATE Date switch √ √ √

INVT Count down √ √ √

Communication
instruction SUM SUM.LB SUM verify √ √ √

BCC BCC.LB BCC verify √ √ √

CRC CRC.LB CRC verify √ √ √

LRC LRC.LB LRC verify √ √ √

 Support
Instruction Instruction 32 bit language
8 bit model Instruction function
type name model
LD FBD IL

COMM COMM.LB Serial communications √ √ √

MODR Modbus read √ √ √

MODW Modbus write √ √ √

HWRD Speedbus read √ √ √

HWWR Speedbus write √ √ √

RCV Receive communication data √ √ √

XMT XMT.LB Sent communication data √ √ √

FROM Extend module CR register read √ √ √

TO Extend module CR register write √ √ √

TCPMDR Modbus TCP read √ √ √

TCPMDW Modbus TCP write √ √ √

TCPHWR Speedbus TCP read √ √ √

TCPHWW Speedbus TCP write √ √ √

Interrupt
instruction ATCH Interrupt binding √ √ √

DTCH Interrupt release √ √ √

ENI Enable interrupt √ √ √

 Support
Instruction Instruction 32 bit language
8 bit model Instruction function
type name model
LD FBD IL

DISI Disable interrupt √ √ √

MC Master control √ √ √

MCR Master control clear √ √ √

FOR Loop command √ √ √

NEXT Loop end √ √ √

WAIT Delay wait √ √ √

Program
control
instruction
CALL Call subroutine √ √ √

EXIT Condition exit √ √ √

REWD Scanning time reset √ √ √

JMPC Condition jump √ √ √

LBL Jump label √ √ √

Special
function GPWM General pulse width modulation √ √ √
instruction

FTC Fuzzy temperature control √ √ √

PID PID control √ √ √

HAL D.HAL Upper limit alarm √ √ √

LAL D.LAL Lower limit alarm √ √ √

 Support
Instruction Instruction 32 bit language
8 bit model Instruction function
type name model
LD FBD IL

LIM D.LIM Range limitation √ √ √

SC D.SC Linear conversion √ √ √

VC Valve control √ √ √

TTC Temperature curve control √ √ √

APID Self-tuning PID √ √ √

General declare of the instruction

1. En enable input :En is the enable input item of the instruction ,Only En have

electricity (ON), the instruction executed, otherwise not executed.

2. Eno Enable output: Eno is the Enable output item of the instruction, indicate the

instruction is executing. When En have electricity (ON) and instruction executed

properly then Eno output have electricity (ON), when En have not electricity (OFF)

or instruction executed error (e.g:parameter not property of the instruction ) then

Eno output have not electricity (OFF). The application instruction in LD. FBD

language ,the great mass of the instruction have Eno Enable output item, All IL

instructions have not Eno output item,it will be instead of the ENO instruction in IL

language.

3. In LD language the AND. OR. XOR instructions, will be instead of logic link.

4. 32 bit instruction at 16 bit instruction name "D.", indicate use 2 continuous

register.Such as ADD,16 bit addition is ADD,32 bit addition is D.ADD.

5. 8 bit instruction at 16 bit instruction behind the name plus ".LB", indicate only use

the low byte of the register .Such as COMM,16 bit instruction is COMM,8 bit
 instruction is COMM.LB.

6. When the parameter items of many instruction which autoOccupy several

continuous register, pay special attention to them when programming , avoid

reusing the register to program execution incorrect.

Note: except CV48~CV79 are 32 bit register (total 32 entries),PLC other registers (AI.

AQ. V. SV. LV. TV. CV. P) all are 16 bit register, one 16 bit register have 2 byte

compose, one 32 bit register have 2 continuous 16 bit registers compose.

Compare switch
Compare switch used in LD program language dedicated, divide into:16 bit compare

instruction. 32 bit compare instruction. floating point compare instruction. low

byte compare instruction. high byte compare instruction.

Compare mode have:equal to (=). unequal to (<>). greater than(>). greater than or

equal to (≥). less than (<). less than and equal to(≤) six type.

Program example: ,instruction list as follows:

Support
Instruction language
8 bit model 32 bit model Instruction function
name
LD FBD IL

Equal to compare switch ,have 16 bit/32 bit /low

= LB.= HB.= D.= √
byte/high byte model

Unequal to compare switch ,have 16 bit/32 bit /low

<> LB.<> HB.<> D.<> √
byte/high byte model

Greater than compare switch ,have 16 bit/32 bit /low

> LB.> HB.> D.> √
byte/high byte model

Great than or equal to compare switch ,have 16

>= LB.>= HB.>= D.>= √
bit/32 bit /low byte/high byte model

Less than compare switch ,have 16 bit/32 bit /low

< LB.< HB.< D.< √
byte/high byte model

Less than or equal to compare switch ,have 16

<= LB.<= HB.<= D.<= √
bit/32 bit /low byte/high byte model
 Support
Instruction language
8 bit model 32 bit model Instruction function
name
LD FBD IL

F.= Floating-point number equal to compare switch √

F.<> Floating-point number unequal to compare switch √

F.> Floating-point number greater than compare switch √

Floating-point number greater than or equal to

F.>= √
compare switch

F.< Floating-point number less than compare switch √

Floating-point number less than or equal to

F.<= √
compare switch

Step instruction

Step instruction list as follows

Support
Instruction language
8 bit model 32 bit model Instruction function
name
LD FBD IL

STL Step start √

SFROM Step combine √

STO Step jump √

[step instruction declare]

1. Subroutine. interrupt routine not support step instruction,FBD,IL language not

support step instruction.

2. In the step not support jump . loop instruction.

3. If a step is ON ,the program within the step be executed, then not executed.
 4. Support step branch . step combine process.

5. Jump between the step, the last step state and OUT instruction outputs . timer

coil T and current value TV . counter coil C and current value CV within the step

will be clear .SET instruction will be not reset.

6. When the step roll-out ,Y output want keep ON be use SET instruction drive the

output , want clear the output to OFF, use RST instruction.

7. Step number Sn cannot repeat , without step instruction in the program the S

relay can be used as general internal relay.

8. If want terminate the step , use RST Sx to reset the step, batch reset use the

ZRST instruction.

9. Any S component can be used the start step , start step use STO or SET start ,

step jump use STO instruction.

10. The program can activate 10 different step process at the same time .

STL(Step start)

Instruction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
Without Without
format

[Instruction function and effect declare]

STL instruction represent a step start , if the step have electricity ,the program

within the step be executed, then not executed.

[Instruction example]
[Program description]:

1. When M2=ON then start step S3,by now S3=ON

2. When S3=ON, moreover jump condition X0=ON, then go to step S20,by now

S20=ON. S3=OFF

3. When S20=ON then Y0=ON, when jump condition X1=ON , then go to step

S30,by now S30=ON. S20=OFF. Y0=OFF

 , when jump condition X4=ON , then go to step S31,by

now S31=ON. S20=OFF. Y0=OFF

, when jump condition X7=ON , then go to step S32,by

now S32=ON. S20=OFF. Y0=OFF

(step selectivity branch)

4. When S30=ON then Y1=ON, when jump condition X2=ON , then go to step

S40,by now S40=ON. S30=OFF. Y1=OFF

5. When S40=ON then Y2=ON, when jump condition X3=ON , then go to step

S50,by now S50=ON. S40=OFF. Y2=OFF

6. When S31=ON then Y3=ON, when jump condition X5=ON , then go to step

S41,by now S41=ON. S31=OFF. Y3=OFF

7. When S41=ON then Y4=ON, when jump condition X6=ON , then go to step

S50,by now S50=ON. S41=OFF. Y4=OFF

8. When S32=ON then Y5=ON, when jump condition X10=ON , then go to step

S42,by now S42=ON. S32=OFF. Y5=OFF

9. When S42=ON then Y6=ON, when jump condition X11=ON , then go to step

S50,by now S50=ON. S42=OFF. Y6=OFF

10. When S50=ON then Y7=ON, when jump condition X12=ON , then go to step

S3,by now S3=ON. S50=OFF. Y7=OFF, circulate repeatedly.

SFROM (Step combine)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example
 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
Without Without
format

[Instruction function and effect declare]

SFROM use for combine after step parallel branch.

[Instruction example]

[Program description ]:

1. When program start the first scanning cycle SM2=ON, start step S3,by now

S3=ON
 2. When S3=ON, moreover jump condition X0=ON , then go to step S20,by now

S20=ON. S3=OFF

3. When S20=ON then Y0=ON, when jump condition X1=ON , then go to step

S30 S31 (step parallel branch)at the same time,by now S30=ON. S31=ON.

S20=OFF. Y0=OFF

4. When S30=ON then Y1=ON, when jump condition X2=ON , then go to step

S40,by now S40=ON. S30=OFF. Y1=OFF

5. When S40=ON then Y2=ON

6. When S31=ON then Y3=ON, when jump condition X3=ON , then go to step

S41,by now S41=ON. S31=OFF. Y3=OFF

7. When S41=ON then Y4=ON

8. When S40=ON moreover S41=ON (step parallel branch combine), moreover

jump condition X5=ON时, then go to step S60,by now S60=ON. S40=OFF.

Y2=OFF. S41=OFF. Y4=OFF

9. When S60=ON then Y7=ON, when jump condition X6=ON , then go to step

S3,by now S3=ON. S60=OFF. Y7=OFF, circulate repeatedly.

10. If M2=ON ,then batch reset 100 steps start from s0 ,that is S0~S99.

STO(Step jump)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
Without Without
format

[Instruction function and effect declare]

 STO use for start next step process, or bring the program process go to the

specified step number.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]:

1. When M2=ON , start step S3,by now S3=ON

2. When S3=ON, moreover jump condition X0=ON , then go to step S20,by now

S20=ON. S3=OFF

3. When S20=ON then Y0=ON,at the same time start timer T0, when T0 time is

up , then go to step S30,by now S30=ON. S20=OFF. Y0=OFF. T0=OFF

4. When S30=ON then Y1=ON, when jump condition X1=ON , then go to step

S60,by now S60=ON. S30=OFF. Y1=OFF

5. When S60=ON then Y7=ON, when jump condition X2=ON , then go to step

S3,by now S3=ON. S60=OFF. Y7=OFF, circulate repeatedly.

, when exit condition X3=ON , then reset step S60,by

now S60=OFF. Y7=OFF, terminate the step.

Bit instruction

Bit instruction list as follows

Support
Instruction language
8 bit model 32 bit model Instruction function
name
LD FBD IL

AND Logic AND √ √

OR Logic OR √ √

XOR Logic XOR √ √

OUT Coil output √ √ √

SET Setting √ √ √

RST Reset √ √ √

ALT ON/OFF alternately output √ √ √

ZRST Batch reset √ √ √

ENO Get ENO output √

AND(Logic AND)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example
 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
Without AND In1, In2 [, … , In15], Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

In1 Operand 1 √

In2 Operand 2 √

… … …

In15 Operand 15 √

Out Status output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

AND instruction logic AND a group bit component of Input and then output ,only

In1~In15 Input states all are ON the Out=ON ,otherwise Out=OFF,support 2~15

variable Input.

OR(Logic OR)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
Without OR In1, In2 [, … , In15], Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

In1 Operand 1 √

In2 Operand 2 √

… … …

In15 Operand 15 √

Out Status output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

OR instruction logic OR a group bit component of Input and then output ,if only one

of In1~In15 Input states is ON the Out=ON ,otherwise Out=OFF,support 2~15

variable Input.

XOR(Logic XOR)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
Without XOR In1, In2 [, … , In15], Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

In1 Operand 1 √

In2 Operand 2 √

… … …
 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

In15 Operand 15 √

Out Status output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

XOR instruction logic XOR a group bit component of Input and then output , when

the ON odd number of In1~In15 Input states the Out=ON ,otherwise

Out=OFF,support 2~15 variable Input.

OUT(Coil output)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
OUT In, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

In Input √

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

OUT instruction assign Input state to Output,In=ON then Out=ON,In=OFF then

Out=OFF.

SET(Setting)

In
struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
SET In, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

In Input √

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

SET instruction according Input state to set output,In=ON then Out=ON,In=OFF

then Out keep the original state.SET instruction general used edge Input

executed.

RST(Reset)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
RST In, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

In Input √

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

 1. RST instruction according Input state to reset Output ,In=ON then

Out=OFF,In=OFF then Out keep the original state.RST instruction general used

edge Input executed.

2. If Out is timer Tx,at the same time reset the timer coil T and current value TV, if

Output is counter Cx,at the same time reset the counter coil C and current value

CV.

3. If Out is step relay S,except reset the step state, if the step is executing then

reset the output of the OUT instruction . timer coil T and current value TV . counter

coil C and current value CV within the step .

ALT(ON/OFF alternately output)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
ALT In, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

In Input √

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

ALT instruction negation the input state to output state, In=ON then Out negation it

self,In=OFF then Out keep the original state.ALT instruction general used edge

Input executed.
 ZRST(Batch reset)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
ZRST En, N, Des
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable Input √

Component numbers to be √
N 1~256
reset

Eno Enable output √

Start address of component

Des √
to be reset

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. ZRST instruction batch reset N component start from Des.ZRST instruction

general used edge Input executed.

2. If Des is timer Tx, will reset timer coil T and current value TV,Iif Output is

counter Cx, will reset counter coil C and current value CV.

3. if Des is step state S,except reset the step state, if the step is executing then

reset the output of the OUT instruction . timer coil T and current value TV . counter

coil C and current value CV within the step.

ENO(Get ENO output)

In
struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
Without Without EnO Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. IL Language All instruction without Eno Enable outpu item in IL Language ,for

programmed by IL Language and FBD Language . LD Language the same

function, in IL language special add ENO instruction, it's function equal to the Eno

Enable output items of the application instruction in FBD. LD Language.

2. ENO instruction only one Output item,the state of Output items only relate to the

first item near the ENO instruction in BD or LD language have Eno Output

instruction.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

1. MAX instruction is a FBD or LD language instructionwhich have Eno Output

item, moreover nearest ENO instruction(because OUT instruction have not Eno

Output item), so in program, the output item state M0 of ENO instruction relate to

MAX instruction executive condition.

2. When X0=ON (X2 normal close),M100=ON

 3. M100=ON, MAX instruction execute ,V10 equal to V1000. V1001. V1002 the 3

registers maximum,Eno Output=ON of the MAX instruction

4. X2=OFF,Y0=OFF

5. ENO instruction get Eno Output of previous instruction,because MAX instruction

Eno Output=ON,so the M0 state is ON

6. M0=ON,ADD instruction执行,AQ0=V10+200

Timer

Timer list as follows

Support
Instruction language
8 bit model 32 bit model Instruction function
name
LD FBD IL

TON Delay ON √ √ √

TOF Delay OFF √ √ √

TP Pulse timer √ √ √

Note:T252~T255 time base fixed to 1ms.Others timer time base can be set arbitrarily

to 10ms. 100ms. 1s.

TON(Delay ON)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example
 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
TON.ns In, Pt, Tx
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

T252~T255 time base are 1ms.Others can be set arbitrarily

ns Base time value
to 10ms. 100ms. 1s

In Input √

Pt Set time √

Out Timer coil Tx √

TV Current time √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. TON is delay ON instruction , when In=ON, start timer timing,TV is the current

value of the timer, when TV equal to the set time (time time to),Out(timer output

coil Tx)=ON,and stop timing.When In turn into OFF,Out(timer output coil Tx)=OFF,

moreover TV value reset to zero.In the timing process(time non-arrival),In turn into

OFF, then stop timing,Out(timer output coil Tx)=OFF, moreover TV value reset to

zero.

2. Timing time= time base(ns)× setting time(Pt).E.g,:time base is 1s,setting time

Pt=10, then delay on time is 1s × 10 = 10s.

[Instruction example]
 [Program sketch map]

[Program description]

Timing time= time base(1s)× setting time (Pt=10)=10s.When X0=ON, timer T0

start timing, when TV0=10,T0=ON(Y0=ON) moreover stop timing .If X0=OFF,then

T0=OFF(Y0=OFF),TV=0.

TOF(Delay OFF)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
TOF.ns In, Pt, Tx
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

T252~T255 time base is 1ms.Others can be set arbitrarily

ns Time base
to 10ms. 100ms. 1s

In Input √
Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Pt Setting time √

Out Timer coil Tx √

TV Current time √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. TOF is delay OFF instruction, when In=ON,Out(Timer coil Tx)=ON, When In

state from ON go to OFF, start timer timing,TV is the timer current value, when TV

equal to setting time (time time to),Out(Timer coil Tx)=OFF, and stop

timing,TV=0.In the timing process(time non-arrival),the state of In go to ON, then

Out (Timer coil Tx)=ON, timer stop timing,TV=0.

2. Timing time=time base(ns)× setting time(Pt).e.g.:time base is 10ms,Setting time

Pt=1000, then delay OFF time is 10ms × 1000 = 10s.

[Instruction example]

[Program sketch map]

 [Program description]

Timing time=time base (10ms)× setting time(Pt=1000)=10s.When

X0=ON,T0=ON(Y0=ON), when X0=OFF, Timer T0 start timing, when

TV0=1000,T0=OFF(Y0=OFF) moreover stop timing TV=0.if time non-arrival

X0=ON, then T0=ON(Y0=ON), stop timing TV=0.

TP(Pulse timer)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
TP.ns In, Pt, Tx
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

T252~T255 time base is 1ms.Others can be set arbitrarily

ns Time base
to 10ms. 100ms. 1s

In Input √

Pt Setting time √

Out Timer coil Tx √

TV Current time √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. TP is pulse timer, when In=ON,Out(Timer coil Tx)=ON, start timer timing,TV is

timer current value, when TV equal to setting time (time arrival),Out(Timer coil
 Tx)=OFF,stop timing moreover TV value reset to zero.In the timing process(time

non-arrival),regardless of the state of In changed, timer keep timing,Out(Timer coil

Tx) keep ON.

2. Timing time= time base(ns)× setting time(Pt).e.g.:time base is 100ms,setting

timePt=100 , then the delay ON time is 100ms × 100 = 10s.

[Instruction example]

[Program sketch map]

[Program description]

Timing time= time base(100ms)× setting time(Pt=100)=10s.When

X0=ON,T0=ON(Y0=ON),timer T0 start timing, when TV0=100,T0=OFF(Y0=OFF)

moreover stop timing TV0=0.In the timing process,regardless of the state of X0

changed,timer keep timing,T0 keep ON until timing terminate.

Counter

Counter list as follows

Support
Instruction language
8 bit model 32 bit model Instruction function
name
LD FBD IL
 Support
Instruction language
8 bit model 32 bit model Instruction function
name
LD FBD IL

CTU D.CTU Increase counter √ √ √

CTD D.CTD Decrease counter √ √ √

CTUD D.CTUD Increase and Decrease counter √ √ √

Note:C48~C79 are 32 bit counter, others are 16 bit counter.

CTU. D.CTU(Increase counter)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
CTU Cu, PV, Cx

Instruction
D.CTU Cu, PV, Cx
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Cu Increase count input √

PV Counter preset √

Out Counter coil Cx √ Among C48~C79 are 32 bit counter ,total 32 point

CV Counter current value √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

CTU is 16 bit increase counter instruction (D.CTU is 32 bit), when increase count

input Cu from OFF go to ON, counter add 1, when CV great than or equal to PV,
 Out (counter coil Cx)=ON. Counting reached,if the counting pulse input again,

counting will be continue ,CV value will be added 1 continue , until reach maximum

value(16 bit counter maximum value is 32767,32 bit counter maximum value is

2147483647),counting will not be continue after reach maximum value.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When X0 from OFF go to ON once,CV0 add 1, when CV0 ≧ 10 counting

reach,C0=ON(Y0=ON).

CTD. D.CTD(Decrease counter)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
CTD Cd, PV, Cx

Instruction
D.CTD Cd, PV, Cx
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Cd Decrease count input √

PV Counter preset √
 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Out Counter coil Cx √ Among C48~C79 are 32 bit counter ,total 32 point

CV Counter current value √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. CTD is 16 bit increase counter instruction (D.CTU is 32 bit), When decrease

count input Cu from OFF go to ON, counter subtract 1, when CV=0 then counting

reached, Out (counter coil Cx)=ON.Counting reached ,if the counting pulse input

again, counting will not be continue.

2. When CTD instruction loaded or reset ,CV = PV, that is CTD decrease from

preset to 0.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When program running CV=10, when X0 from OFF go to ON once,CV0 decrease

1, when CV0 = 0 counting reach,C0=ON(Y0=ON).

CTUD. D.CTUD(Increase and Decrease counter)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example
 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
CTUD Cu, Cd, PV, Cx

Instruction
D.CTUD Cu, Cd, PV, Cx
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Cu Increase count Input √

Decrease input
Cd √
Input

PV Counter preset √

Out Counter coil Cx √ Among C48~C79 are 32 bit counter ,total 32 point

CV Counter current value √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. CTUD is 16 bit increase and decrease counter instruction (D.CTUD is 32 bit),

when increase count input Cu from OFF go to ON,counter add 1, when decrease

count Input Cd from OFF go to ON,counter subtract 1, when CV great than or

equal to PV, Out (counter coil Cx)=ON, When CV less than PV, Out (counter coil

Cx)=OFF.

2. 16 bit counter maximum CV value is 32767,minimum CV value is -32768,32 bit

counter maximum CV value is 2147483647,minimum CV value is -2147483648.

[Instruction example]
[Program description]

When X0 from OFF go to ON once,CV0 add 1, when X1 from OFF go to ON

once,CV0 subtract 1, when CV0 ≧ 10,C0=ON(Y0=ON), When CV0 ＜

10,C0=OFF(Y0=OFF).
High speed control instruction

High speed control instruction list as follows

Support
Instruction language
8 bit model 32 bit model Instruction function
name
LD FBD IL

SHC Single high speed counter √ √ √

RESH IO refresh √ √ √

HHSC High speed counter √ √ √

HCWR Write high speed counter √ √ √

SPD Speed detection √ √ √

PWM Pulse width modulation √ √ √

PLSY D.PLSY Pulse output √ √ √

PLSR D.PLSR Accelerate and decelerate pulse output √ √ √

ZRN Origin point return √ √ √

SETZ Set electric origin point √ √ √

PPMR Linear interpolation √ √ √

CIMR Circular interpolation √ √ √

SPLS Single pulse output √ √ √

 Support
Instruction language
8 bit model 32 bit model Instruction function
name
LD FBD IL

SYNP Synchronization pulse output √ √ √

PSTOP Stop pulse output √ √ √

[High speed control instruction declare]

1. PLC high speed counter and high speed pulse output defined by channel

,related the hardware of the PLC ,Configured by "PLC hardware configure". High

speed counter channel signify by HSCx ,each channel use 2 high speed pulse

input point .High speed pulse output channel signify by PLSx , each channel use 2

high speed pulse output point .

2. High speed counter support :pulse/direction . positive/negative pulse . A/B

phase pulse input model, support 1. 2. 4 frequency multiplication counting model ,

refer to" HSC high speed counter parameter".

3. High speed pulse output support : single pulse. pulse/direction .

positive/negative pulse . A/B phase pulse . synchronization pulse output,refer

to"PLS high speed pulse output parameter".

4. Motion control support linear interpolation . circular interpolation .

synchronization pulse output etc.; support absolute address . relative address ;

support backlash compensation ;support electric origin point redefine etc..

5. SM system state bit of high speed counter as follows:

SM Function declare R/W Preserve Default

HSC0 study enable control,0 is normal

SM25 R/W No 0
state,1 is study state
SM26 HSC0 study confirm control R/W No 0

HSC0 reset control 0 is automatic reset 1

SM27 R/W No 0
is not reset

HSC0 direction indication,0 is increase,1

SM30 R No 0
is decrease

SM31 HSC0 error indication R No 0

HSC1 study enable control,0 is normal

SM33 R/W No 0
state,1 is study state

SM34 HSC1 study confirm control R/W No 0

HSC1 reset control 0 is automatic reset 1

SM35 R/W No 0
is not reset

HSC1 direction indication,0 is increase,1

SM38 R No 0
is decrease

SM39 HSC1 error indication R No 0

HSC2 study enable control,0 is normal

SM41 R/W No 0
state,1 is study state

SM42 HSC2 study confirm control R/W No 0

HSC2 reset control 0 is automatic reset 1

SM43 R/W No 0
is not reset

HSC2 direction indication,0 is increase,1

SM46 R No 0
is decrease
SM47 HSC2 error indication R No 0

HSC3 study enable control,0 is normal

SM49 R/W No 0
state,1 is study state

SM50 HSC3 study confirm control R/W No 0

HSC3 reset control 0 is automatic reset 1

SM51 R/W No 0
is not reset

HSC3 direction indication,0 is increase,1

SM54 R No 0
is decrease

SM55 HSC3 error indication R No 0

HSC4 study enable control,0 is normal

SM57 R/W No 0
state,1 is study state

SM58 HSC4 study confirm control R/W No 0

HSC4 reset control 0 is automatic reset 1

SM59 R/W No 0
is not reset

HSC4 direction indication,0 is increase,1

SM62 R No 0
is decrease

SM63 HSC4 error indication R No 0

HSC5 study enable control,0 is normal

SM65 R/W No 0
state,1 is study state

SM66 HSC5 study confirm control R/W No 0

SM67 HSC5 reset control 0 is automatic reset 1 R/W No 0
is not reset

HSC5 direction indication,0 is increase,1

SM70 R No 0
is decrease

SM71 HSC5 error indication R No 0

HSC6 study enable control,0 is normal

SM73 R/W No 0
state,1 is study state

SM74 HSC6 study confirm control R/W No 0

HSC6 reset control 0 is automatic reset 1

SM75 R/W No 0
is not reset

HSC6 direction indication,0 is increase,1

SM78 R No 0
is decrease

SM79 HSC6 error indication R No 0

HSC7 study enable control,0 is normal

SM81 R/W No 0
state,1 is study state

SM82 HSC7 study confirm control R/W No 0

HSC7 reset control 0 is automatic reset 1

SM83 R/W No 0
is not reset

HSC7 direction indication,0 is increase,1

SM86 R No 0
is decrease

SM87 HSC7 error indication R No 0

6. SV system register of high speed counter as follows :

SV Function declare R/W Preserve Default

SV60 HSC0 current segment number R Yes 0

SV61 HSC0 low word of current value R Yes 0

SV62 HSC0 high word of current value R Yes 0

SV63 HSC0 error code R Yes 0

SV801 HSC0 low word of frequency R Yes 0

SV802 HSC0 high word of frequency R Yes 0

SV64 HSC1 current segment number R Yes 0

SV65 HSC1 low word of current value R Yes 0

SV66 HSC1 high word of current value R Yes 0

SV67 HSC1 error code R Yes 0

SV803 HSC1 low word of frequency R Yes 0

SV804 HSC1 high word of frequency R Yes 0

SV68 HSC2 current segment number R Yes 0

SV69 HSC2 low word of current value R Yes 0

SV70 HSC2 high word of current value R Yes 0

SV71 HSC2 error code R Yes 0

SV805 HSC2 low word of frequency R Yes 0

SV806 HSC2 high word of frequency R Yes 0

SV72 HSC3 current segment number R Yes 0

SV73 HSC3 low word of current value R Yes 0

SV74 HSC3 high word of current value R Yes 0

SV75 HSC3 error code R Yes 0

SV807 HSC3 low word of frequency R Yes 0

SV808 HSC3 high word of frequency R Yes 0

SV76 HSC4 current segment number R Yes 0

SV77 HSC4 low word of current value R Yes 0

SV78 HSC4 high word of current value R Yes 0

SV79 HSC4 error code R Yes 0

SV809 HSC4 low word of frequency R Yes 0

SV810 HSC4 high word of frequency R Yes 0

SV80 HSC5 current segment number R Yes 0

SV81 HSC5 low word of current value R Yes 0

SV82 HSC5 high word of current value R Yes 0

SV83 HSC5 error code R Yes 0

SV811 HSC5 low word of frequency R Yes 0

SV812 HSC5 high word of frequency R Yes 0

SV84 HSC6 current segment number R Yes 0

SV85 HSC6 low word of current value R Yes 0

SV86 HSC6 high word of current value R Yes 0

SV87 HSC6 error code R Yes 0

SV813 HSC6 low word of frequency R Yes 0

SV814 HSC6 high word of frequency R Yes 0

SV88 HSC7 current segment number R Yes 0

SV89 HSC7 low word of current value R Yes 0

SV90 HSC7 high word of current value R Yes 0

SV91 HSC7 error code R Yes 0

SV815 HSC7 low word of frequency R Yes 0

SV816 HSC7 high word of frequency R Yes 0

7. SM system state bit of High speed pulse output as follows:

SM Function declare R/W Preserve Default

SM93 PLS0 prohibit the forward pulse R/W yes 0

SM94 PLS0 prohibit the reverse pulse R/W yes 0

SM95 PLS0 prohibit the brake function R/W yes 0

SM96 PLS0 pulse output indication R yes 0

PLS0 pulse output direction indication ,0

SM97 R yes 0
is forward ,1 is reverse

SM98 PLS0 error flag R yes 0

PLS0 position model ,0 is relative address

SM99 R/W yes 0
,1 is absolute address

SM100 PLS0 pulse output complete R yes 0

SM109 PLS1 prohibit the forward pulse R/W yes 0

SM110 PLS1 prohibit the reverse pulse R/W yes 0

SM111 PLS1 prohibit the brake function R/W yes 0

SM112 PLS1 pulse output indication R yes 0

PLS1 pulse output direction indication ,0 is

SM113 R yes 0
forward ,1 is reverse

SM114 PLS1 error flag R yes 0

PLS1 position model ,0 is relative address

SM115 R/W yes 0
,1 is absolute address

SM116 PLS1 pulse output complete R yes 0

SM125 PLS2 prohibit the forward pulse R/W yes 0

SM126 PLS2 prohibit the reverse pulse R/W yes 0

SM127 PLS2 prohibit the brake function R/W yes 0

SM128 PLS2 pulse output indication R yes 0

PLS2 pulse output direction indication ,0 is

SM129 R yes 0
forward ,1 is reverse

SM130 PLS2 error flag R yes 0

PLS2 position model ,0 is relative address

SM131 R/W yes 0
,1 is absolute address

SM132 PLS2 pulse output complete R yes 0

SM141 PLS3 prohibit the forward pulse R/W yes 0

SM142 PLS3 prohibit the reverse pulse R/W yes 0

SM143 PLS3 prohibit the brake function R/W yes 0

SM144 PLS3 pulse output indication R yes 0

PLS3 pulse output direction indication ,0 is

SM145 R yes 0
forward ,1 is reverse

SM146 PLS3 error flag R yes 0

PLS3 position model ,0 is relative address

SM147 R/W yes 0
,1 is absolute address

SM148 PLS3 pulse output complete R yes 0

SM157 PLS4 prohibit the forward pulse R/W yes 0

SM158 PLS4 prohibit the reverse pulse R/W yes 0

SM159 PLS4 prohibit the brake function R/W yes 0

SM160 PLS4 pulse output indication R yes 0

PLS4 pulse output direction indication ,0 is

SM161 R yes 0
forward ,1 is reverse

SM162 PLS4 error flag R yes 0

SM163 PLS4 position model ,0 is relative address R/W yes 0

 ,1 is absolute address

SM164 PLS4 pulse output complete R yes 0

SM173 PLS5 prohibit the forward pulse R/W yes 0

SM174 PLS5 prohibit the reverse pulse R/W yes 0

SM175 PLS5 prohibit the brake function R/W yes 0

SM176 PLS5 pulse output indication R yes 0

PLS5 pulse output direction indication ,0 is

SM177 R yes 0
forward ,1 is reverse

SM178 PLS5 error flag R yes 0

PLS5 position model ,0 is relative address

SM179 R/W yes 0
,1 is absolute address

SM180 PLS5 pulse output complete R yes 0

SM189 PLS6 prohibit the forward pulse R/W yes 0

SM190 PLS6 prohibit the reverse pulse R/W yes 0

SM191 PLS6 prohibit the brake function R/W yes 0

SM192 PLS6 pulse output indication R yes 0

SM193 PLS6 pulse output direction indication ,0 is R yes 0

forward ,1 is reverse
SM194 PLS6 error flag R yes 0

PLS6 position model ,0 is relative address

SM195 R/W yes 0
,1 is absolute address

SM196 PLS6 pulse output complete R yes 0

SM205 PLS7 prohibit the forward pulse R/W yes 0

SM206 PLS7 prohibit the reverse pulse R/W yes 0

SM207 PLS7 prohibit the brake function R/W yes 0

SM208 PLS7 pulse output indication R yes 0

PLS7 pulse output direction indication ,0 is

SM209 R yes 0
forward ,1 is reverse

SM210 PLS7 error flag R yes 0

PLS7 position model ,0 is relative address

SM211 R/W yes 0
,1 is absolute address

SM212 PLS7 pulse output complete R yes 0

8. SV system register of high speed pulse output as follows:

SV Function declare R/W Preserve Default

SV92 PLS0 current segment number R Yes 0

SV93 PLS0 low word of pulse output number R Yes 0

SV94 PLS0 high word of pulse output number R Yes 0

SV95 PLS0 low word of current position R/W Yes 0

SV96 PLS0 high word of current position R/W Yes 0

SV97 PLS0 error code R Yes 0

SV156 PLS0 low word of mechanical original point R/W Yes 0

PLS0 high word of mechanical original

SV157 R/W Yes 0
point

PLS0 number of pulses to compensate the

SV158 R/W Yes 0
reverse interval

PLS0 follow performance parameters,

SV159 R/W Yes 50
range: 1~100

SV98 PLS1 current segment number R Yes 0

SV99 PLS1 low word of pulse output number R Yes 0

SV100 PLS1 high word of pulse output number R Yes 0

SV101 PLS1 low word of current position R/W Yes 0

SV102 PLS1 high word of current position R/W Yes 0

SV103 PLS1 error code R Yes 0

SV160 PLS1 low word of mechanical original point R/W Yes 0

PLS1 high word of mechanical original

SV161 R/W Yes 0
point

PLS1 number of pulses to compensate the

SV162 R/W Yes 0
reverse interval

PLS1 follow performance parameters,

SV163 R/W Yes 50
range: 1~100

SV104 PLS2 current segment number R Yes 0

SV105 PLS2 low word of pulse output number R Yes 0

SV106 PLS2 high word of pulse output number R Yes 0

SV107 PLS2 low word of current position R/W Yes 0

SV108 PLS2 high word of current position R/W Yes 0

SV109 PLS2 error code R Yes 0

SV164 PLS2 low word of mechanical original point R/W Yes 0

PLS2 high word of mechanical original

SV165 R/W Yes 0
point

PLS2 number of pulses to compensate the

SV166 R/W Yes 0
reverse interval

SV167 PLS2 follow performance parameters, R/W Yes 50

 range: 1~100

SV110 PLS3 current segment number R Yes 0

SV111 PLS3 low word of pulse output number R Yes 0

SV112 PLS3 high word of pulse output number R Yes 0

SV113 PLS3 low word of current position R/W Yes 0

SV114 PLS3 high word of current position R/W Yes 0

SV115 PLS3 error code R Yes 0

SV168 PLS3 low word of mechanical original point R/W Yes 0

PLS3 high word of mechanical original

SV169 R/W Yes 0
point

PLS3 number of pulses to compensate the

SV170 R/W Yes 0
reverse interval

PLS3 follow performance parameters,

SV171 R/W Yes 50
range: 1~100

SV116 PLS4 current segment number R Yes 0

SV117 PLS4 low word of pulse output number R Yes 0

SV118 PLS4 high word of pulse output number R Yes 0

SV119 PLS4 low word of current position R/W Yes 0

SV120 PLS4 high word of current position R/W Yes 0

SV121 PLS4 error code R Yes 0

SV172 PLS4 low word of mechanical original point R/W Yes 0

PLS4 high word of mechanical original

SV173 R/W Yes 0
point

PLS4 number of pulses to compensate the

SV174 R/W Yes 0
reverse interval

PLS4 follow performance parameters,

SV175 R/W Yes 50
range: 1~100

SV122 PLS5 current segment number R Yes 0

SV123 PLS5 low word of pulse output number R Yes 0

SV124 PLS5 high word of pulse output number R Yes 0

SV125 PLS5 low word of current position R/W Yes 0

SV126 PLS5 high word of current position R/W Yes 0

SV127 PLS5 error code R Yes 0

SV176 PLS5 low word of mechanical original point R/W Yes 0

PLS5 high word of mechanical original

SV177 R/W Yes 0
point
SV178 PLS5 number of pulses to compensate the R/W Yes 0
reverse interval

PLS5 follow performance parameters,

SV179 R/W Yes 50
range: 1~100

SV128 PLS6 current segment number R Yes 0

SV129 PLS6 low word of pulse output number R Yes 0

SV130 PLS6 high word of pulse output number R Yes 0

SV131 PLS6 low word of current position R/W Yes 0

SV132 PLS6 high word of current position R/W Yes 0

SV133 PLS6 error code R Yes 0

SV180 PLS6 low word of mechanical original point R/W Yes 0

PLS6 high word of mechanical original

SV181 R/W Yes 0
point

PLS6 number of pulses to compensate the

SV182 R/W Yes 0
reverse interval

PLS6 follow performance parameters,

SV183 R/W Yes 50
range: 1~100

SV134 PLS7 current segment number R Yes 0

SV135 PLS7 low word of pulse output number R Yes 0

 SV136 PLS7 high word of pulse output number R Yes 0

SV137 PLS7 low word of current position R/W Yes 0

SV138 PLS7 high word of current position R/W Yes 0

SV139 PLS7 error code R Yes 0

SV184 PLS7 low word of mechanical original point R/W Yes 0

PLS7 high word of mechanical original

SV185 R/W Yes 0
point

PLS7 number of pulses to compensate the

SV186 R/W Yes 0
reverse interval

PLS7 follow performance parameters,

SV187 R/W Yes 50
range: 1~100

SHC(Single high counter)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
SHC En, PV, Dir, Reset, X, Out, HVal
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

PV Preset value √ Occupy 2 continuous component

Dir Counter direction √

Reset Reset √

X Pulse input √

Out Comparison results √

High speed counter current

HVal √ Occupy 2 continuous component
value

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. SHC instruction counts the high-speed impulse input of the Xn input point , it

does not use the HSCx high-speed pulse input channel, one high-speed pulse

input channel has two high-speed pulse input points. Therefore the host with eight

pulse input channels can achieve the fucntion of 16 ways high-speed pulse input.

2. SHC instruction is a 32-bit high-speed pulse counter, it does not generate high-

speed counter interrupt, and it doesn't use the SM, SV.

3. Dir terminal control the counting direction, when Dir = OFF it adds

counting;while when Dir = ON,it reduces counting.

4. Reset terminal controls the reset of the counter,when Reset = ON , it resets the

counter.

5. When "HVal" is greater than or equal to "PV" , "Out" is equal to "ON", when

"HVal" is less than "PV", then "Out" is equal to "OFF".

 [Instruction example]

[Program description]

1. When M0=ON , HSC high-speed counter works, it begings counting the high-

speed pulse input of the X0 input.

2. When M8=OFF, it adds counting, when M8=ON,it reduces counting.

3. When V50>=V1000, M100=ON, while when V50<V1000, M100=OFF .

4. When M9=ON, it resets the counter, M100=OFF, V50=0.

RESH(IO refresh)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
RESH En, IO, N
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

IO IO start address be refreshed √ Occupy N continuous component

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Number of component be
N √ 1~256
refreshed

Eno Enable output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. RESH instruction use for refresh the state of external digital Input . Output (X.

Y), in order to improve the response speed of the external signal.

2. En is the enable item of the instruction , when the state of En ON, the N

continuous component (X. Y) of IO assigned will be updated immediately , without

having to wait until the program scan complete

,the IO state update independence to the program scan cycle.

Note: the instruction used for real-time or high accuracy control circumstance ,as

high speed control . interrupt processing etc. .Without RESH instruction in the

program ,PLC external Input . Output state will be updated after the total program

scaned finish.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When X0=ON,Y0~Y7 Output state updated immediately , without having to wait

until the program scan complete.

HHSC(High speed counter )

In
struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
HHSC En, PV, N, Mod, HSCx, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

Start address of preset √

PV Each segmentOccupy 2 register
value

Number of compare √
N 1-48
segments

Comp
0-2:0 is single segment compare , 1 is absoulte compare ,
Mod √
2 is relatively compare
are model

HSCx High speed counter number √

Start address of compare

Out √ Each segmentOccupy 1 component
result

High speed counter current

HVal √ Occupy 2 System register
value

High speed counter current

HFre √ Occupy 2 System register
frequency value

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. HHSC instruction is deal with the high speed pulse input , it can deal with input

pulse counting and measure the pulse frequency at the same time.
 2. High speed counter support :pulse/direction . positive/negative pulse . A/B

phase pulse input model, support 1. 2. 4 frequency multiplication counting model ,

refer to"HSC high speed counter parameter"

3. HHSC instruction relate to SM system state bit . SV System register , when

count value=preset value generate " HSCx current value=preset value ( the preset

value of each segment will be generated) " interrupt , when the direction of input

pulse changed will be generate "HSCx input direction changed " interrupt .

4. Support multi-segment compare ,support 3 type compare model :single segment

compare . absolute model compare . relatively model compare .

5. HHSC instruction have self-learning function ,in the self-learning can record the

current value to the preset value , can continuous multi-segment self-learning .The

high speed counter HSCx will be reset while enter into or quit the self-learning

state .

6. Reset high speed counter . modify the preset value real time . modify the current

value . modify the current segment number ,use HCWR instruction.

7. When En=ON,HHSC instruction executing, when En=OFF ,stop counting.

[High speed counter model and pulse waveform]

Count model Pulse waveform

Times Decrease
Model Increase count
frequency count

0 --pulse/direction 1

1 --pulse/direction 2

2 --
1
foreward/reversal
 Count model Pulse waveform

Times Decrease
Model Increase count
frequency count

3 --
2
foreward/reversal

4 -- A/B phase 1

5 -- A/B phase 2

6 -- A/B phase 4

[Instruction example 1]
[Program 1 declare]
PV Value Declare
component
200 First segment preset
V1000V1001

V1002V1003 500
Second segment preset

1200
V1004V1005 Third segment preset

V1006V1007 1500
Fourth segment preset

1. When M0=ON ,HHSC instruction executing ,high speed counter HSC0 set to

single segment compare model ,number of compare segments are 4.Initial

segment number is 1,HSC0 first segment preset value=200(V1000V1001) for

compare.
 2. When M1=ON ,instead HSC0 current segment number to 2,then HSC0 second

segment preset value =500(V1002V1003) for compare .

3. When M2=ON ,instead HSC0 preset of current segment to 1000,that is second

segment preset value=1000(V1002V1003).

4. When M3=ON ,reset HSC0 ,HSC0 current value =0,HSC0 current segment

number=1

[Instruction example 2]

[Program 2 schematic diagram]

PV Value
Declare
component

200
V1000V1001 First segment preset

V1002V1003 500
Second segment preset

1000
V1004V1005 Third segment preset

V1006V1007 1500
Fourth segment preset
[program 2 declare]

1. When M0=ON ,HHSC instruction executing , high speed counter HSC0 set as

absolute compare model,number of compare segments are 4.

2. When M3=ON ,reset HSC0 ,HSC0 current value =0,HSC0 current segment

number=1

[Instruction example 3]

[Program 3 schematic diagram]

PV Declare
Value
component

300
V1000V1001 First segment preset

V1002V1003 200
Second segment preset

V1004V1005 450 Third segment preset

 V1006V1007 150
Fourth segment preset

[Program 3 declare]

1. When M0=ON,HHSC instruction executing ,high speed counter HSC0 set as

relatively compare model ,number of compare segments are 4.

2. When M3=ON ,reset HSC0 ,HSC0 current value=0,HSC0 current segment

number=1

[Instruction example 4]

[Program 4 declare]

1. When M0=ON ,HHSC instruction executing, high speed counter HSC0 set as

single segment compare Model ,number of compare segments 4.The initial

segment of number 1.
 2. When M1=ON ,SM25=ON,HSC0 enter into study state, reset HSC0 at the

same time.

3. When M2=ON,SM26=ON,HSC0 learn confirm that is write HSC0 current

value to current segment preset value, segment number add 1 automatic go to

next segment ,if segment number great than number of segments (this example

N=4) then segment number =1.each SM26=ON once record one segment preset

value .

4. At study finish ,reset M1=OFF,SM25=OFF,HSC0 quit study state , reset HSC0

at the same time.

HCWR(Write high speed counter)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
HCWR En, Val, Kind, HSCx
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

Val Value be wrote √

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

0-3:0-write current segment,1-write current preset value,2-

Kind Value type be wrote √ write high speed counter current value,3- reset high speed
counter

HSCx High speed counter number √

Eno Enable output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. HCWR instruction use for high speed counter assist control ,use cooperate

HHSC instruction ,accomplish reset high speed counter . modify the preset value

real time . modify high speed counter current value . modify current segment

number.

2. If segment number be wrote exceed HSCx number of segment setting (HHSC

instruction item N define) range ,HSCx report no.1 parameter error .

3. HCWR must be executed by edge .

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M3=ON, reset high speed counter HSC0,HSC0 current value =0,current

segment number =1.

SPD(Speed detection )

In
struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
SPD En, TnP, X, HFre
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

Detection time or number of √ TnP＞0 is detection time (unit 0.1ms),TnP＜0 is

TnP
pulse detection number of pulse

X pulse input √

Eno Enable output √

HFre Frequency value √ Occupy 2 continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. SPD instruction detection the pulse frequency of the high speed input point

XnInput of MPU .It nonuse HSCx high speed pulse input channel ,1 high speed

pulse input channel have 2 high speed pulse input point .That is the MPU with 8

channels high speed pulse can realize detection 16 channels high speed input

pulse .

2. SPD instruction support use time or number of pulse model to detection

frequency , when TnP＞0 then use time model to detection frequency (unit

0.1ms), when TnP＜0 then use number of pulse model to detection frequency

.TnP=0 then HFre=0.

 3. For detection frequency ensure , when input pulse frequency great than 19KHz

please use time model to detection (Suggestion detection time great than

500ms,TnP＞5000) , when input pulse frequency less than 19KHz please use

number of pulse to detection frequency .

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

1. When M0=ON ,detect X0 pulse input frequency value ,detection time

5000*0.1ms=500ms, that is 500ms refresh once .

2. When M1=ON ,detect X7 pulse input frequency value, number of detection

pulses are 600, that is 600 pulses detected refresh once .

PWM(Pulse width modulation)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
PWM En, PulR, PulF, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

PulR Pulse duty factor √ Unit 0.1%,range 0~1000

PulF Pulse output frequency √ Occupy 2 continuous

Out Pulse output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. PWM instruction output assigned frequency . duty factor pulse via high speed

pulse output point Yn of MPU .It nonuse PLSx high speed pulse output channel ,1

high speed pulse output channel have 2 high speed pulse output point .That is the

MPU with 8 channels high speed pulse can realize detection 16 channels high

speed output pulse .

2. When PulF≤0 no pulse output , when PulF＜minimum frequency (10Hz) then

use minimum frequency , when PulF＞ maximum frequency then use maximum

frequency .

3. When PulF＞0,if PulR＞0 moreover PulR＜1000 ,Out output pulse of duty factor

PulR . frequency Pul ,if PulR=0 then Out output low level ,if PulR≥1000 then Out

output high level signal.

4. PulR. PulF value can modified real time.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]
 1. When M0=ON, from Y3 output pulse which duty factor is 30%. frequency is

50KHz pulse signal .

2. When M0=OFF, pulse output stop.

PLSY. D.PLSY(Pulse output)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
PLSY En, PulF, PulN, PLSx

Instruction
D.PLSY En, PulF, PulN, PLSx
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

PulF Pulse output frequency √

PulN Number of pulse output √

The channel of

PLSx pulse output √

Eno Enable output √

Number
Pn √ Occupy 2 system register
of pulse already
output
Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Pos Current position √ Occupy 2 system register

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. PLSY is single segment pulse output instruction.

2. PulN is number of output pulse,PulN＞0 express output forward pulse ;PulN＜0

express output reverse pulse ;when PulN＝0 and relative address mode ,express

output continuous pulse not take into account numbers.

3. PulF is pulse output frequency .PulN＝0 (output continuous pulse not take into

account numbers), if PulF=0 then no output,PulF＞0 express output forward

pulse,PulF＜0 express output reverse pulse. PulN≠0 ,if PulF≤0 then no output,

PulF great than 0 however less than minimum frequency (10Hz) then according to

minimum frequency output, PulF greater than maximum frequency then according

to maximum frequency output

4. PLSY instruction relate to SM system state bit. SV system register, moreover

generate pulse output interrupt , instruction start executing pulse output general

"PLSx start output pulse " interrupt , instruction executed complete stop pulse

output general " PLSx output complete" interrupt .

5. En=ON instruction executing ,Eno=ON; When pulse output process En go to

OFF, then stop pulse output,Eno=OFF.

6. PLSY instruction there is not number of branches ,can coexist with others pulse

output instruction ,but each pulse output channel only one instruction at the same

time .

7. At instruction executing pulse output process, PulF pulse output frequency can

be modified real time ,PulN can not be modified real time .

[Instruction example]
 [Program description]

1. When M0=ON ,pulse output channel PLS0 use 50KHz frequency output 30000

forward pulse ,M100=ON ,output finish SM100=ON, reset M0,set M1.

2. When M1=ON ,pulse output channel PLS0 use 200KHz frequency output

150000 reverse pulse,M101=ON ,output finish SM100=ON ,reset M1.

PLSR. D.PLSR( Accelerate and decelerate pulse output)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
PLSR En, MaxF, PulN, Tms, PLSx

Instruction
D.PLSR En, MaxF, PulN, Tms, PLSx
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

Pulse output maximum √

MaxF
frequency

PulN Total output pulses √

Accelerate and decelerate √

Tms (5~5000ms)
time

PLSx Pulse output channel √

Eno Enable output √

Number of pulse already

Pn √ Occupy 2 system register
output

Pos Current position √ Occupy 2 system register

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. PLSR is have accelerate and decelerate single segment pulse output instruction

.Tms accelerate and decelerate time , when Tms=0 express have no accelerate

and decelerate , when Tms＜ minimum accelerate and decelerate time then

according to minimum accelerate and decelerate time , when Tms＞ maximum

accelerate and decelerate time then according to maximum accelerate and

decelerate time.

2. MaxF is pulse output maximum frequency ,MaxFmust greater than 0,MaxF

greater than 0 however less than minimum frequency (10Hz) then according

minimum frequency output, MaxF greater than maximum frequency then

 according to maximum frequency output,MaxF≤0 then no output, report no.3

parameter error.

3. PulN is total output pulses ,greater than 0 express output forward pulse ,less

than 0express output reverse pulse, equal to 0 then no output, report no.3

parameter error .

4. PLSR instruction relate to SM system state bit. SV system register , moreover

general pulse output interrupt, instruction start executing pulse output general

"PLSx start output pulse " interrupt , instruction executed complete stop pulse

output general " PLSx output complete" interrupt .

5. En=ON instruction executing ,Eno=ON; When pulse output process En go to

OFF, instruction according to Tms slow down brake stop (no setup brake stop

),Eno=OFF.

6. PLSR instruction there is not number of branches ,can coexist with others pulse

output instruction ,but each pulse output channel only one instruction at the same

time .

7. At instruction executing pulse output process, MaxF. PulN can not be modified

(not take effect real time be modified, need rerun instruction).

[Instruction example]
 [Program description]

1. When M0=ON, pulse output channel PLS1 use 50KHz frequency output 30000

forward pulse ,accelerate and decelerate time 50ms,M100=ON, output finish

SM116=ON, reset M0,set M1.

2. When M1=ON ,pulse output channel PLS1 use100KHz frequency output

200000 reverse pulse ,accelerate and decelerate time 120ms,M101=ON, output

finish SM116=ON, reset M1.

3. When M55=ON ,pulse output channel PLS1 Stop pulse output.

ZRN(Origin point return)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example
 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
ZRN En, DOG, PulF, DPulF, Tms, PLSx, End
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

DOG Near point signal √

PulF Origin return frequency √ Occupy 2 continuous component

DPulF Near point frequency √ Occupy 2 continuous component

Accelerate and decelerate √

Tms (5~5000ms)
time

PLSx Pulse output channel √

Eno Enable output √

End The origin return to complete √

Pos Current position √ Occupy 2 system register

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. When ZRN executing , according to near point frequency as the initial

frequency ,accelerate to origin return frequency start moving,Slow down while

approaching the origin to the near point frequency.

 2. DOG = 0, said back to electrical origin.The current position > electrical origin, in

order to reduce pulse direction,The current location < electric origin, in order to

add pulse direction.After they back to the origin of the electric current position is

set to 0.If the current location = electrical origin, the instruction is not action.

3. DOG = 1, said back to the mechanical origin, no near point signal.The current

position > mechanical origin, in order to reduce pulse direction,The current location

< mechanical origin, in order to add pulse direction.After they back to the origin of

the mechanical ,Set the current position = mechanical origin.If the current location

= mechanical origin, the instruction is not action.

4. DOG terminal specified external input point X,Said use near point signal back to

the mechanical origin.When using the DOG near point signal,ZRN instruction with

the function of search DOG,ZRN fixed to reduce pulse direction.

a). The current position when the outside of the DOG,ZRN instruction from near

point frequency acceleration origin return frequency ,when the near point signal (DOG)

from OFF to ON,started to slow down to near point frequency (Crawl speed),when the

near point signal (DOG) from ON to OFF,pulse output to stop,the origin return to
complete.After back to the mechanical origin, set the current position = mechanical

origin.

b). The current location on the interior of the DOG or the DOG,ZRN instruction from

near point frequency acceleration origin return frequency,until met LSR back limit switch

to slow down to zero,then reverse forward;When the near point signal (DOG) from ON

to OFF,slowed to zero and then back again;When the near point signal (DOG) from

OFF to ON,started to slow down to near point frequency (Crawl speed),when the near

point signal (DOG) from ON to OFF,pulse output to stop,the origin return to

complete.After back to the mechanical origin, set the current position = mechanical

origin.
5. When design the near point signal (DOG) , please think about DOG front and

back have enough length , thus after sensed the DOG signal from OFF go to ON

have enough time to decelerate to crawl frequency , no then result in position

offset .

6. Near point signal (DOG) should connect to PLC MPU X input point , no then be

influenced by scanning cycle result in position offset .

7. ZRN instruction relate to SM system state bit. SV system register .

8. When PulF=0,report no.3 parameter error no output pulse , no then when PulF

＜minimum frequency (10Hz) then use minimum frequency , when PulF＞

maximum frequency then use maximum frequency .

9. When DPulF＜minimum frequency (10Hz)or DPulF＞maximum frequency , that

is near point output frequency overrange use minimum frequency .

10. When Tms＜minimum accelerate and decelerate time then use minimum

accelerate and decelerate time, When Tms＞maximum accelerate and decelerate

time then use maximum accelerate and decelerate time.

 11. After the instruction started, all of parameter can not modified ,until instruction

turn off .

12. When En=OFF ,all output actions will be stop immediately .

[Instruction example]

[Program description]
 1. When M0=ON,PLS0 use 50KHz frequency output 4000 forward pulse ,output

complete SM100=ON,PLS1 use 50KHz frequency output 3000 forward pulse

,output complete SM116=ON.reset M0

2. When M1=ON ,set (4000,3000) to electrical origin point, mechanical origin point

changed to (-4000,-3000).

3. When M2=ON,PLS0 and PLS1 to back to the origin of 20 KHZ frequency,

frequency of 1 KHZ near point back to the mechanical origin,current location

(4000, 3000).

4. When M3=ON,PLS0 and PLS1 to back to the origin of 20 KHZ frequency,

frequency of 1 KHZ near point back to the electrical origin,current location (0, 0).

SETZ(Set electric origin point)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example
 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
SETZ En, PLSx
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

PLSx Pulse output channel √

Eno Enable output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

When system initial ,electrical origin point is mechanical origin point .after

executed SETZ instruction ,set current position to electrical origin point, current

position clear zero.

[Instruction example]
[Program sketch map]

[Program description]

1. When M0=ON,PLS0 use 50KHz frequency output 4000 forward pulse ,output

complete SM100=ON,PLS1 use 50KHz frequency output 3000 forward pulse

,output complete SM116=ON.reset M0

2. When M1=ON ,set (4000,3000) to electrical origin point, mechanical origin point

changed to (-4000,-3000).

PPMR(Linear interpolation)
 In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction PPMR En, XTpos, YTpos, PulF, ATms, DTms, XPLSx,

format YPLSx, End

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

XTpos X target location √ Occupy 2 continuous component

YTpos Y target location √ Occupy 2 continuous component

PulF Pulse output frequency √ Occupy 2 continuous component

ATms Accelerate time √ (5~5000ms)

DTms Decelerate time √ (5~5000ms)

XPLSx X pulse output channel √

Y pulse o
YPLSx √
utput channel
Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Eno Enable output √

Li

End √
near interpolation
complete

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. PPMR instruction use current position for starting point, use (XTpos,YTpos) end

point , make linear interpolation output.

2. Starting point and end point can not the same point , no then report no.3

parameter error.

3. PPMR instruction relate to SM system state bit . SV system register.

4. When PulF=0,report no.3 parameter error no pulse output , no then When PulF

＜minimum frequency (10Hz) then use minimum frequency , when PulF＞

maximum then use maximum frequency.

5. When ATms=0, it means there is no acceleration function. When ATms<0, it

reports the error of the No.3 parameter. When ATms>maximum acceleration time

or maximum deceleration time, then use the maximum acceleration time or the

maximum deceleration time correspondingly. When DTms=0, it means no

deceleration function. DTms<0 reports the error of the No.3 parameter. When

DTms>maximum acceleration time or maximum deceleration time, then use the

maximum acceleration time or the maximum deceleration time correspondingly.

6. After the instruction started, all of parameter can not modified ,until instruction

turn off.

7. When En=OFF ,all output will be stop immediately.

[Instruction example]
[Program sketch map]
[Program description]

1. Via initial register table " linear interpolation parameter" setup 4 segment linear

coordinate value .
Reg Value

ister Declare
component

7000
V1000V1001 X target location0

V1002V1003 7000
Y target location0

14000
V1004V1005 X target location1

V1006V1007 0
Y target location1

7000
V1008V1009 X target location2

-7000
V1010V1011 Y target location2

0
V1012V1013 X target location3

0
V1014V1015 Y target location3

50000
V1016V1017 Pulse frequency

50
V1018 Accelerate time

50
V1019 Decelerate time

2. The program first scan cycle SM2=ON, setup PLS0. PLS1 position model to

absolute address model(SM99=ON,SM115=ON).

3. X axis is PLS0,Y axis is PLS1, when M0=ON,V0=0, execute from current

position (0,0) to (7000,7000) linear interpolation .

4. 1 segment interpolated complete M100=ON,V0=1, execute from (7000,7000) to

(14000,0) linear interpolation .

5. 2 segment interpolated complete M100=ON,V0=2, execute from(14000,0) to

(7000,-7000) linear interpolation .

 6. 3 segment interpolated complete M100=ON,V0=3, execute from(7000,-7000) to

(0,0) linear interpolation .

7. 4 segment interpolated complete M100=ON,V0=4,reset M0,M0=OFF.

CIMR(Circular interpolation )

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction CIMR En, XTpos, YTpos, CR, PulF, ATms, DTms, Dir,
format XPLSx, YPLSx, End

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

XTpos X target location √ Occupy 2 continuous component

YTpos Y target location √ Occupy 2 continuous component

CR Circle radius √ Occupy 2 continuous component

PulF Pulse output frequency √ Occupy 2 continuous component

 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

ATms Accelerate time √ (5~5000ms)

DTms Decelerate time √ (5~5000ms)

Dir Direction of motion √

XPLSx X pulse output channel √

Y pulse o
YPLSx √
utput channel

Eno Enable output √

Circular interpolation
End √
complete

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. CIMR instruction use current position as starting point ,use (XTpos,YTpos) as

end point , use CR as radius, make circular interpolation output.

2. Starting point and end point can not the same point , if radius less than half

distance from staring point to end point (CR＜L / 2,L= distance from staring point

to end point ), then report no.3 parameter error.

3. CR＞0 express minor arc( the arc which less than semi-circle ),CR＜0 express

major arc (the arc which greater than semi-circle ),Dir

is direction of motion

(0-clockwise,1-anticlockwise)

4. CIMR instruction relate to SM system state bit. SV system register.

 5. When PulF=0,report no.3 parameter error no pulse output, no then when PulF＜

minimum frequency (10Hz) then use minimum frequency , when PulF＞ maximum

frequency then use maximum frequency .

6. When ATms=0, it means there is no acceleration function. When ATms<0, it

reports the error of the No.3 parameter. When ATms>maximum acceleration time

or maximum deceleration time, then use the maximum acceleration time or the

maximum deceleration time correspondingly. When DTms=0, it means no

deceleration function. DTms<0 reports the error of the No.3 parameter. When

DTms>maximum acceleration time or maximum deceleration time, then use the

maximum acceleration time or the maximum deceleration time correspondingly.

7. After the instruction started, all of parameter can not modified ,until instruction

turn off.

8. When En=OFF ,all output will be stop immediately.

[Instruction example]
[Program sketch map]

[Program description]
 1. Via initial register table " circular interpolation parameter" setup 2 segment arc

coordinate value.
Reg Value

ister Declare
component

9000
V1000V1001 X target location0

V1002V1003 0
Y target location0

0
V1004V1005 X target location1

V1006V1007 0
Y target location1

4500
V1008V1009 Circle radius

50000
V1010V1011 Pulse frequency

60
V1012 Accelerate time

60
V1013 Decelerate time

2. The program first scan cycle SM2=ON, set PLS1. PLS3 position model absolute

addressModel(SM115=ON,SM147=ON).

3. X axis is PLS1,Y axis is PLS3, when M0=ON,V0=0,executing anticlockwise

circular interpolation according to current position(0,0) for starting point (9000,0)

radius is 4500.

4. 1 segment circular interpolation completeM100=ON,V0=1,executing

anticlockwise circular interpolation from (9000,0) to (0,0) radius is 4500 .

5. 2 segment circular interpolation completeM100=ON,V0=2,reset M0,M0=OFF.

SPLS(Single pulse output)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example
 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
SPLS En, MaxF, PulN, Tms, Out, End, Pn
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

Pulse output maximum √

MaxF Occupy 2 continuous component
frequency

PulN Total number of pulse output √ Occupy 2 continuous component

Accelerate and decelerate √

Tms (5~5000ms)
time

Out Pulse output √

End Pulse output complete √

Number of pulse already

Pn √ Occupy 2 continuous component
output

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. SPLS instruction via MPU high speed pulse output point Yn output high speed

pulse, it not use PLSx high speed pulse output channel,1 high speed pulse output

channel have 2 high speed output points. Thus MPU with 8 pulse output channel

can carry out 16 high speed pulse outputs.

2. SPLS instruction only output pulse, direction need controlled by Y output point

in the program ,it will not generate pulse output interruption ,not use SM. SV.
 3. When Tms=0 express no accelerate and decelerat, no then when Tms＜

minimum accelerate and decelerate time then use minimum accelerate and

decelerate time, when Tms＞maximum accelerate and decelerate time then use

maximum accelerate and decelerate time.

4. When MaxF≤0 no pulse output , no then when MaxF＜ minimum frequency

(10Hz) then use minimum frequency , when MaxF＞ maximum frequency then

use maximum frequency .

5. When PulN=0 express not take into account pulse output ;when PulN＞0 then

according to PulN pulses output, pulse output complete End set; when PulN＜0

no pulse output .

6. MaxF can be modified real time ,PulN can not be modified real time .

[Instruction example]
 [Program description]

1. When M0=ON ,Y3 use 50KHz frequency output 30000 pulses ,Y15=OFF(OFF

express forward direction),M100=OFF

2. When pulse output complete,M100=ON, reset M0, set M1.

3. When M1=ON ,Y3 use 200KHz frequency output 15000 pulses ,Y15=ON (ON

express reverse direction),M101=OFF

4. When pulse output complete ,M101=ON, reset M1.

SYNP(Synchronization pulse output)

In

struction format and parameter specification

 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
SYNP En, RMul, RDiv, PulN, Maixs, SPLSx
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

RMul Multiplying factor √ Occupy 2 continuous component

D
RDiv √ Occupy 2 continuous component
ivide factor

PulN Number of delay pulses √

Maixs Main axis √

PLSx Pulse output channel √

Eno Enable output √

SPos Slave current position √ Occupy 2 system register

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1.SYNP instruction realizes electronic gear function, specifing that the slave axis

SPLSx pulse output follows the change of the pulse of master axis Maxis, the ratio
 between them coefficient K = RMul / RDiv. SPLSx direction consistent with the

direction of the spindle Maxis, RMul and RDiv must be greater than zero.

2.Maxis is defined as the master axis. When Maxis are specified as X0, X2, X4,

X6, X8, X10, X12 and X14, they indicate the high-speed pulse input channels

HSC0~ HSC7.

3.PulN specifies the number of delay pulses. After Maxis inputs "pulN" pulses,

SPLSx starts to follow Maxis. If PulN ≤0,it indicates no delay.

4.When multiple SYNP instructions execute at the same time , Maxis can be

repeated, SPLSx can not be repeated, that is to say a master axis can drive

multiple slave axises.

5.SYNP instruction relate to SM system state bit . SV system register , If Maxis is

high-speed pulse input channel, it will generate high-speed counter direction

change interrupt.

6.SYNP instruction does not have the limitation on the number, it can coexist with

other pulse output instructions, but each pulse output channel can only execute

one instruction at the same time.

7.After this instruction is started, the parameters RMul and RDiv can't be modified

in real time.

[Instruction example]
 [Program description]

1. X10=ON, then M0=ON,SYNP instruction executing ,PLS1 after delay 15 pulses

,use 1:1 HSC0 pulse input to output.

2. X11=ON, then M0=OFF, SYNP instruction executing stop.

PSTOP(Stop pulse output)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
PSTOP En, PLSx
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

PLSx Pulse output channel √

Eno Enable output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

PSTOP instruction refer to PLSx Stop pulse output .

[Instruction example]

Refer to PLSR instruction example.

Compare instruction

Compare instruction list as follows

Support
Instruction language
8 bit model 32 bit model Instruction function
name
LD FBD IL

CMP D.CMP Compare instruction √ √ √

ZCP D.ZCP Regional comparison √ √ √

MATC D.MATC Numerical value match √ √ √

ABSC D.ABSC Absolute cam comparison √ √ √

BON ON bit determine √ √ √

BONC D.BONC ON bit numbers √ √ √

MAX D.MAX Maximum √ √ √

MIN D.MIN Minimum √ √ √

SEL D.SEL Selection of conditions √ √ √

MUX D.MUX Multi-choice √ √ √

CMP. D.CMP(Compare)

In

struction format and parameter specification

 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
CMP En, In1, In2, Out

Instruction
D.CMP En, In1, In2, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

In1 Input1 √

In2 Input2 √

Out Status output √ Occupy 3 continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

CMP is 16 bit integer compare instruction (D.CMP is 32 bit integer compare), at

the same time output＞. =. ＜ these 3 result.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

1. 16 bit compare CMP instruction, when AI1>500 then M10=ON, when AI1=500

then M11=ON, when AI1<500 then M12=ON.

 2. 32 bit compare D.CMP instruction, when V10V11>V0V1 then M20=ON, when

V10V11=V0V1 then M21=ON, when V10V11<V0V1 then M22=ON.

ZCP. D.ZCP(Regional comparison)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
ZCP En, In, Up, Down, Out

Instruction
D.ZCP En, In, Up, Down, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

In Input √

Up Regional upper limit √

Down Regional lower limit √

Out Status output √ Occupy 3 continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. ZCP is 16 bit integer regional compare instruction(D.CMP is 32 bit integer

regional compare ),at the same time output ＞. =. ＜ these 3 result.

 2. If regional upper limit Up < regional lower limit Down, then instruction will swap

them automatic .

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

1. 16 bit compare ZCP instruction , when AI1>3000 then M10=ON, when AI1≤3000

moreover AI1≥500 then M11=ON, when AI1<500 then M12=ON.

2. 32 bit compare D.ZCP instruction, when V0V1>V1000V1001 then M20=ON,

when V0V1≤V1000V1001 moreover V0V1≥V1002V1003 then M21=ON, when

V0V1＜V1002V1003 then M22=ON.

MATC. D.MATC(Numerical match)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
MATC En, In, Par, N, Out

Instruction
D.MATC En, In, Par, N, Out
format
Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

In Input √

MATC: occupy

Numerical value match start

Par
component
√ N continuous component,
D.MATC: occupy 2N continuous component

N Number to compare √ 1~256

Out Status output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

MATC instruction compare In input and N data start from Par ,if In equal to one of

then express match right Out=ON, no then Out=OFF.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

1. MATC instruction get electricity from busbar and always execute .

2. As long as V0 equal to one of V1000. V1001. V1002. V1003. V1004. V1005

then match right M0=ON, no then M0=OFF.

ABSC. D.ABSC(Absolute cam comparison)

In
struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
ABSC En, In, Par, N, Out

Instruction
D.ABSC En, In, Par, N, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

In Input √

ABSC: occupy 2N c

Multi-segment compare start ontinuous component

Par √
component
,D.ABSC: occupy 4 continuous
component

1-
Number of compare
N √
segments
64

Start address of compare

Out √ Occupy N continuous component
result

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. ABSC instruction region compare In input N segment data start from Par

,compare results output to start from out N continuous component.

2. To the segment which lower limit ≤ upper limit , if lower limit≤In≤ upper limit,

then compare result of the segment Output=ON, if In＜lower limit or In＞upper

limit, then compare result of the segment Output =OFF.

 3. To the segment which lower limit＞upper limit,if upper limit≤In≤ lower limit, then

compare result of the segment Output=OFF, if In＞lower limit or In＜upper limit,

then compare result of the segment Output=ON.

4. Parameter Par and N relation declare:

Number of
Par component Out component
Number compare
meaning meaning
segments N

1 segment lower limit

1 1 segment compare
1
result output
1 segment upper limit
2
2 segment lower limit
3 2 segment compare
2
result output
2 segment upper limit
4
… … …
…
8 segment lower limit
15 8 segment compare
8
result output
8 segment upper limit
16

[Instruction example]

[Program sketch map]

Par
Declare
component Value

40
V1000 1 segment lower limit

100
V1001 1 segment upper limit

V1002 120
2 segment lower limit

210
V1003 2 segment upper limit

140
V1004 3 segment lower limit

60
V1005 3 segment upper limit

V1006 150 4 segment lower limit

 390
V1007 4segment upper limit

[Program description]

1. M0=ON,region compare V0 and start from V1000 4 segment.

2. When V0 is 40~100,Y0=ON, no then Y0=OFF; when V0 is 120~210 ,Y1=ON, no

then Y1=OFF; when V0 is 60~140 ,Y2=OFF, wo then Y2=ON; when V0 is

150~390,Y3=ON, no then Y3=OFF.

3. When M0=OFF, instruction stop execute ,Y0~Y3 remain unchanged.

BON(ON bit determine)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
BON En, In, N, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En
 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

In Input √

N Which bit √ 1~16

Out Status output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

BON instruction use to determine the bit of the register whether or not 1,result

output to Out.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

1. BON instruction get electricity from busbar and always execute

2. If V0=8( binary 00000000 00001000, fourth bit is 1), then M0=ON.

BONC. D.BONC(ON bit numbers)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
BONC En, In, Out

Instruction
D.BONC En, In, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

In Input √

Enable
Eno √
output

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

BONC instruction get the number which the bit is 1 of the register, result output to

Out.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

1. BONC instruction get electricity from busbar and always execute

2. If V0=1234(binary 00000100 11010010, total 5 bits are 1),then V100=5.

MAX. D.MAX(Maximum)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example
 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
MAX En, Par, N, Out

Instruction
D.MAX En, Par, N, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

Compare value start √ MAX: occupy N continuous component, D.MAX:

Par
component occupy 2N continuous component

N Number data for compare √ 2~256

Eno Enable output √

Out Compare result output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

MAX instruction compare N data start from Par ,maximum output to Out.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

1. M0=ON, if V1000=30. V1001=-150. V1002=25. V1003=8. V1004=95.

V1005=-20, then V0=95.

 2. M0=ON, if V1100V1101=30000. V1102V1103=-50000. V1104V1105=23000.

V1106V1107=600. V1108V1109=1500, then V10V11=30000.

3. When M0=OFF, instruction stop execute ,Out remain unchanged.

MIN. D.MIN(Minimum)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
MIN En, Par, N, Out

Instruction
D.MIN En, Par, N, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

Compare value start

component MIN: occupy N continuous component, D.MIN: occupy
Par √
2N continuous component

N Number data for compare √ 2~256

Eno Enable output √

Out Compare result output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

MIN instruction compare N data start from Par ,minimum output to Out.

[Instruction example]
 [Program description]

1. M0=ON, if V1000=30. V1001=-150. V1002=25. V1003=8. V1004=95.

V1005=-20, then V0=-150.

2. M0=ON, if V1100V1101=30000. V1102V1103=-50000. V1104V1105=23000.

V1106V1107=600. V1108V1109=1500, then V10V11=-50000.

3. When M0=OFF, instruction stop execute ,Out remain unchanged.

SEL. D.SEL(Selection of conditions)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
SEL En, G, In1, In2, Out

Instruction
D.SEL En, G, In1, In2, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

G selection condition √
 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

In1 select data 1 √

In2 select data 2 √

Eno Enable output √

Out Select result output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

SEL instruction is either-or instruction, G=OFF then Out=In1,G=ON then Out=In2.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

1. SEL instruction get electricity from busbar and always execute.

2. If AI0=230. AI1=512, M0=OFF then V0=230,M0=ON then V0=512.

MUX. D.MUX(Multi-choice)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example
 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
MUX En, K, Par, N, Out

Instruction
D.MUX En, K, Par, N, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

K Select channel √

√ MUX: occupy N continuous component ,D.MUX: occupy

Par Select data start component
2N continuous component

N Number of data be selected √ 1~256

Eno Enable output √

Out Select result o utput √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

MUX instruction select one of data according to the value of select channel

K(K=0~N-1) from N address continuous register output to Out (multi select one).

schematic diagram as follows:

 [Instruction example]

[Program description]

1. MUX instruction get electricity from busbar and always execute.

2. If V1000=30. V1001=-150. V1002=25. V1003=8. V1004=95. V1005=-20, when

V00=3 express select fourth value output,V10=8.

Shift instruction

Shift instruction list as follows

Support
Instruction language
8 bit model 32 bit model Instruction function
name
LD FBD IL

LBST Low byte evaluation √ √ √

HBST High byte evaluation √ √ √

MOV D.MOV Move √ √ √

BMOV Block move √ √ √

FILL Fill √ √ √

XCH Byte swap √ √ √

BXCH Block swap √ √ √

 Support
Instruction language
8 bit model 32 bit model Instruction function
name
LD FBD IL

SHL Bit left shift √ √ √

SHR Bit right shift √ √ √

WSHL Word left shift √ √ √

WSHR Word right shift √ √ √

ROL Bit rotate left shift √ √ √

ROR Bit rotate right shift √ √ √

WROL Word rotate left shift √ √ √

WROR Word rotate right shift √ √ √

BSHL Byte left shift √ √ √

BSHR Byte right shift √ √ √

ATBL Append to array √ √ √

FIFO First in first out √ √ √

LIFO Last in first out √ √ √

SORT Data sort √ √ √

LBST(Low byte evaluation)

In

struction format and parameter specification

 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
LBST En, In, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

In Input √

Eno Enable output √

Out Data output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

LBST use for specified assignment to the low byte of output register Out , high

byte remain unchanged.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

If initial V1000=0x1E34,then M0=ON V1000=0x1E0C.

HBST(High byte evaluation)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example
 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
HBST En, In, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

In Input √

Eno Enable output √

Out Data output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

HBST use for specified assignment to the high byte of output register Out , low

byte remain unchanged.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

If initial V1001=0xFF6A,then M1=ON V1001=0x856A

MOV. D.MOV(Move)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example
 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
MOV En, In, Out

Instruction
D.MOV En, In, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

In Input √

Eno Enable output √

Out DataOutput √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

Move instruction MOV also call assign instruction, use for assign the specified

data to output register Out.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

Assign the initial value will the program first scan cycle,V0=80,V10V11=-50.

BMOV(Block move)

In
struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
BMOV En, Sou, N, Des
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

Block move start address √

Sou Occupy N continuous component
component

N Number to be moved √ 1~256

Eno Enable output √

Target block move start

Des √ Occupy N continuous component
address component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

BMOV block move instruction move N components start from Sou to N

components start Des .As follows:

[Instruction example]
 [Program description]

When M0=ON, Move V1000~V1005 to V0~V5, Move X0~X4 to Y2~Y6.

Sou
component Initial Move result
value

30
V1000 V0=30

-
V1001 150 V1=-150

V1002 25
V2=25

8
V1003 V3=8

95
V1004 V4=95

-
V1005 20 V5=-20

X0 ON
Y2=ON

OFF
X1 Y3=OFF

ON
X2 Y4=ON

ON
X3 Y5=ON

OFF
X4 Y6=OFF

FILL(Fill)

In

struction format and parameter specification

 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
FILL En, In, N, Des
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

In Data to fill √

N Number of fill data √ 1~256

Eno Enable output √

Move target block start

Des √ Occupy N continuous component
component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

Fill instruction FILL use for fill the In value into Des start N component.Can use for

batch reset . set register component and bit component.As follows:

[Instruction example]
 [Program description]

When M0=ON, Reset V100~104 5 registers to 0, reset Y0~Y11 to OFF, set

M100~M105 to ON.

XCH(Byte swap). D.XCH(Register swap)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit XCH En, Sou, N

Instruction
format D.XCH En, Sou, N

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

Sou Start register to swap √ Occupy N continuous component

N Number of swap registers √ 1~256

 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Eno Enable output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. 16 bit instruction XCH is byte swap , use for start from Sou N registers swap the

high low byte .As follows:

2. 32 bit instruction D.XCH is register swap ,use for start from Sou N register

component each border upon 2 register swap, if N is odd then the last one

register unchanged.As follows:

3. XCH

instruction general executed by edge.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON, Swap high low byte of V1000. V1001 these 2 registers ,swap

V1002. V1003 these 2 registers ,swap V1004. V1005 these 2 registers .

Sou c Initial value Sw
 omponent ap result

30
V1000 (0x001E) V1000=7680 (0x1E00)

-
V1001 150 (0xFF6A) V1001=27391(0x6AFF)

V1002 25
V1002=8

8
V1003 V1003=25
95
V1004 V1004=-20

-
V1005 20 V1005=95

BXCH(Block swap)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
BXCH En, Sou1, Sou2, N
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

Sou1 Source 1 start component √ Occupy N continuous component

Sou2 Source 2 start component √ Occupy N continuous component

 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

N Number of component √ 1~256

Eno Enable output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. Block swap instruction BXCH use for start from Sou1 N components and start

from Sou2 N components.As follows:

2. BXCH

instruction general executed by edge.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON, Swap V1000~V1002 these 3registers and V1003~V1005 these 3

register.
c Sw
Initial value
omponent ap result

30
V1000 V1000=8

-
V1001 150 V1001=95

V1002 25 V1002=-20
 8
V1003 V1003=30

95
V1004 V1004=-150

-
V1005 20 V1005=25

SHL(Bit left shift)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
SHL En, In, Sou, N, Num, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In Bit shift start component √ Occupy Num continuous component

Sou Source start component √ Occupy Num continuous component

N Number of component √ 1~256

Num Shift times √

Eno Enable output √

Out Shift out component √ Occupy Num continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. According to Num a group,SHL instruction use start from Sou N components left

shift Num bit, shift start from In Num components ,shift out start from Out Num

components.As follows:

2. If Sou is register component, then use start from Sou N registers left shift

bitwise Num bit.

3. 1≤Num≤N, no then instruction not execute.

4. SHL instruction general executed by edge.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

1. When M0=ON, M100~M105 left shift 3 bit, shift in X0~X2,shift out put Y0~Y2.
Sou c Initial Left shift result
value
omponent
 O
M100 M100=OFF
N

M101 OFF M101=ON

M102 ON
M102=ON

M103 ON M103=ON
ON
M104 M104=OFF

M105 OFF M105=ON

X0 OFF

ON
X1

X2 ON
Y0 Y0=ON
Y1 Y1=ON
Y2 Y2=OFF

2. When M1=ON,V1000~V1005 bitwise left shift 3 bits, shift in X0~X2,shift out to

M200~M202.
Sou c
Initial value Left shift result
omponent

V1000 00000000 00011110 V1000=00000000 11110110

V1001 11111111 01101010 V1001=11111011 01010000
V1002 00000000 00011001
V1002=00000000 11001111

V1003 00000000 00001000 V1003=00000000 01000000

00000000 01011111
V1004 V1004=00000010 11111000

V1005 11111111 11101100 V1005=11111111 01100000

X0 OFF

ON
X1

X2 ON
M200 M200=ON
M201 M201=ON
M202 M202=ON

SHR(Bit right shift)

In
struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
SHR En, In, Sou, N, Num, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In Bit shift start component √ Occupy Num continuous component

Source start
Sou √ Occupy N continuous component
component

N Number of component √ 1~256

Num Shift times √

Eno Enable output √

Out Shift out component √ Occupy Num continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. According to Num a group ,SHR instruction use start from Sou N components

right shift Num bit, shift start from In Num components ,shift out start from Out

Num components.As follows:

 2. If Sou are register component, then use start from Sou N registers right shift

bitwise Num bit .

3. 1≤Num≤N, no then instruction not executed.

4. SHR instruction general executed by edge.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

1. When M0=ON,M100~M105 right shift 3 bits, shift in X0~X2,shift out to Y0~Y2.

Sou c Initial
Right shift result
omponent value

O
M100 M100=ON
N

M101 OFF M101=ON

M102 OFF
M102=OFF

M103 ON M103=OFF
 M104 ON M104=ON

M105 OFF M105=ON

X0 OFF

ON
X1

X2 ON
Y0 Y0=ON
Y1 Y1=OFF
Y2 Y2=OFF

2. When M1=ON,V1000~V1005 right shift 3 bits bitwise, shift in X0~X2,shift out to

在M200~M202.
Sou c
Initial value Right shift result
omponent

V1000 00000000 00011110 V1000=01000000 00000011

V1001 11111111 01101010 V1001=00111111 11101101
V1002 00000000 00011001
V1002=00000000 00000011

V1003 00000000 00001000 V1003=11100000 00000001

00000000 01011111
V1004 V1004=10000000 00001011

V1005 11111111 11101100 V1005=11011111 11111101

X0 OFF

ON
X1

X2 ON
M200 M200=OFF
M201 M201=ON
M202 M202=ON

WSHL(Word left shift)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example
 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
WSHL En, In, Sou, N, Num, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In Word shift start component √ Occupy Num continuous component

Sou Source start component √ Occupy N continuous component

N Number of component √ 1~256

Num Shift times √

Eno Enable output √

Out Shift out component √ Occupy Num continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. WSHL instruction use start from Sou N components left shift Num word, shift

start from In Num components ,shift out start from Out Num components.As

follows:
 2. 1≤Num≤N, no then instruction not execute.

3. WSHL instruction general executed by edge.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON,V1000~V1005 left shift 3 word ,shift in V0~V2,shift out to

V100~V102.
Sou c Le
Initial
omponent value ft shift result

V1000 30 V1000=100
V1001 -150 V1001=200
V1002 25
V1002=300

V1003 8 V1003=30
95
V1004 V1004=-150

V1005 -20 V1005=25

V0 100

200
V1

V2 300
V100 V100=8
V101 V101=95
V102 V102=-20
 WSHR(Word right shift)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
WSHR En, In, Sou, N, Num, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In Word shift start component √ Occupy Num continuous component

Sou Source start component √ Occupy N continuous component

N Number of component √ 1~256

Num Shift times √

Eno Enable output √

Out Shift out component √ Occupy Num continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. WSHR instruction use start from Sou N components right shift Num word, shift

start from In Num components ,shift out start from Out Num components.As

follows:
 2. 1≤Num≤N, no then instruction not execute.

3. WSHR instruction general executed by edge.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON,V1000~V1005 right 3 word, shift in V0~V2, shift out to V100~V102.

Sou c Ri
Initial
omponent value ght shift result

V1000 30 V1000=8
V1001 -150 V1001=95
V1002 25
V1002=-20

V1003 8 V1003=100
95
V1004 V1004=200

V1005 -20 V1005=300

V0 100

200
V1

V2 300
V100 V100=30
V101 V101=-150
V102 V102=25
 ROL(Bit rotate left shift)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
ROL En, Sou, N, Num, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Sou Source start component √ Occupy N continuous component

N Number of component √ 1~256

Num Shift times √

Eno Enable output √

Out Shift out component √ Occupy Num continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. According to Num a group ,ROL instruction use start from Sou N components

left shift Num bit, shift start from Sou Num components ,shift out start from Out

Num components.As follows:

 2. If Sou are register component, then use start from Sou N registers left shift

bitwise .

3. 1≤Num≤N, no then instruction not execute .

4. ROL instruction general executed by edge.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

1. When M0=ON, M100~M105 rotate left shift 3 bits, shift out to Y0~Y2.
Sou c Le
Initial
omponent value ft shift result

O
M100 M100=ON
N

M101 OFF M101=ON

M102 ON
M102=OFF

M103 ON M103=ON
ON
M104 M104=OFF
 M105 OFF M105=ON
Y0 Y0=ON
Y1 Y1=ON
Y2 Y2=OFF

2. When M1=ON, V1000~V1005 rotate left shift 3 bits, shift out to M200~M202.
Sou c
Initial value
omponent Left shift result

V1000 00000000 00011110 V1000=00000000 11110111

V1001 11111111 01101010 V1001=11111011 01010000
V1002 00000000 00011001
V1002=00000000 11001111

V1003 00000000 00001000 V1003=00000000 01000000

00000000 01011111
V1004 V1004=00000010 11111000

V1005 11111111 11101100 V1005=11111111 01100000

M200 M200=ON
M201 M201=ON
M202 M202=ON

ROR(Bit rotate right shift)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
ROR En, Sou, N, Num, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Sou Source start component √ Occupy N continuous component

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

N Number of component √ 1~256

Num Shift times √

Eno Enable output √

Out Shift out component √ Occupy Num continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. According to Num a group ,ROR instruction use start from Sou N components

right shift Num bit, shift start from Sou Num components ,shift out start from Out

Num components.As follows:

2. If Sou are register component, then use start from Sou N registers right shift

bitwise .

3. 1≤Num≤N, no then instruction not execute.

4. ROR instruction general executed by edge.

[Instruction example]
[Program description]

1. When M0=ON, M100~M105 rotate right shift 3 bits , shift out to Y0~Y2.
Sou c Ri
Initial
omponent value ght shift result

O
M100 M100=ON
N

M101 OFF M101=ON

M102 OFF
M102=OFF

M103 ON M103=ON
ON
M104 M104=OFF

M105 OFF M105=OFF

Y0 Y0=ON
Y1 Y1=OFF
Y2 Y2=OFF

2. When M1=ON, V1000~V1005 rotate right shift 3 bits, shift out to M200~M202.
Sou c
Initial value
omponent Right shift result

V1000 00000000 00011110 V1000=01000000 00000011

V1001 11111111 01101010 V1001=00111111 11101101
V1002 00000000 00011001
V1002=00000000 00000011

V1003 00000000 00001000 V1003=11100000 00000001

00000000 01011111
V1004 V1004=10000000 00001011

V1005 11111111 11101100 V1005=11011111 11111101

 M200 M200=OFF

M201 M201=ON
M202 M202=ON

WROL(Word rotate left shift)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
WROL En, Sou, N, Num, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Sou Source start component √ Occupy N continuous component

N Number of component √ 1~256

Num Shift times √

Eno Enable output √

Out Shift out component √ Occupy Num continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. WROL instruction use start from Sou N components left shift Num word, shift

start from Sou Num components ,shift out start from Out Num components.As

follows:
 2. 1≤Num≤N, no then instruction not execute .

3. WROL instruction general executed by edge.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON,V1000~V1005 rotate left shift 3 words, shift out to V100~V102.

Sou c Le
Initial
omponent value ft shift result

V1000 30 V1000=8
V1001 -150 V1001=95
V1002 25
V1002=-20

V1003 8 V1003=30
95
V1004 V1004=-150

V1005 -20 V1005=25

V100 V100=8
V101 V101=95
V102 V102=-20

WROR(Word rotate right shift)

In

struction format and parameter specification

 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
WROR En, Sou, N, Num, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Sou Source start component √ Occupy N continuous component

N Number of component √ 1~256

Num Shift times √

Eno Enable output √

Out Shift out component √ Occupy Num continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. WROR instruction use start from Sou N components right shift Num word, shift

start from Sou Num components ,shift out start from Out Num components.As

follows:

2. 1≤Num≤N, no then instruction not execute.

 3. WROR instruction general executed by edge.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON,V1000~V1005 rotate right shift 3 words, shift out to V100~V102.

Sou c Initial
omponent value Right shift result

V1000 30 V1000=8
V1001 -150 V1001=95
V1002 25
V1002=-20

V1003 8 V1003=30
95
V1004 V1004=-150

V1005 -20 V1005=25

V100 V100=30
V101 V101=-150
V102 V102=25

BSHL(Byte left shift)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
BSHL En, In, Sou, N, Num, Out
format
Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Shift in byte start √

In Occupy (Num-1)\2+1 continuous component
component

Sou Source start component √ Occupy N continuous component

N Number of component √ 1~256

Num Shift times √

Eno Enable output √

Out Shift out component √ Occupy (Num-1)\2+1 continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. BSHL instruction use start from Sou N components left shift Num byte, shift in

start from In Num bytes, shift out to start from Out Num bytes.As follows:

2. 1≤Num≤2*N, no then instruction not execute.

3. BSHL instruction general executed by edge.

[Instruction example]
 [Program description]

When M0=ON,V1000~V1005 left shift 3 bytes, shift in V0 and V1 low byte, shift out

to V100 and V101 low byte .

Sou c Le
Initial value
omponent ft shift result

V1000 30(0x001E) V1000=100(0x1234)

V1001 -150(0xFF6A) V1001=200(0x1E78)
25
V1002
(0x0019) V1002=300 (0x6A00)

V1003 8(0x0008) V1003=30(0x19FF)

95
V1004 (0x005F) V1004=-150(0x0800)

V1005 -20(0xFFEC) V1005=25(0x5F00)

4660
V0
(0x1234)

22136
V1 (0x5678)

V100 V100=8(0xEC00)
V101 V101=95(0x00FF)

BSHR(Byte right shift)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example
 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
BSHR En, In, Sou, N, Num, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Shift in byte start √

In Occupy (Num-1)\2+1 continuous component
component

Sou Source start component √ Occupy N continuous component

N Number of component √ 1~256

Num Shift times √

Eno Enable output √

Out Shift out component √ Occupy (Num-1)\2+1 continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. BSHR instruction use start from Sou N components right shift Num byte, shift in

start from In Num bytes, shift out to start from Out Num bytes.As follows:
 2. 1≤Num≤2*N, no then instruction not execute.

3. BSHR instruction general executed by edge.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON,V1000~V1005 right shift 3 bytes, shift in V0 and V1 low byte, shift

out to V100 and V101 low byte.

Sou c Ri
Initial value
omponent ght shift result

V1000 30(0x001E) V1000=100(0x19FF)

V1001 -150(0xFF6A) V1001=200(0x0800)
25
V1002
(0x0019) V1002=300 (0x5F00)

V1003 8(0x0008) V1003=30(0xEC00)

95
V1004 (0x005F) V1004=-150(0x34FF)

V1005 -20(0xFFEC) V1005=25(0x7812)

4660
V0
(0x1234)

V1 22136
 (0x5678)

V100 V100=8(0x001E)
V101 V101=95(0x006A)

ATBL(Append to array)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
ATBL En, In, Tbl, N
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In Input data √

Tbl Array start component √ Occupy N+1 continuous component

N Array length √ 1~256

Eno Enable output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. Append to array instruction ATBL will append bit state or register value to the

array specified by Tbl in sequence.

2. En is instruction Enable item, general use edge type (rising edge or failling

edge) signal.When En state hop ON once , append In value to array specified by

Tbl, array element number add 1(Tbl register content value add 1).

3. Tbl define store data array start component ,N is array length , among the first

register (Tbl)of the array be the numbers of the array element ,Tbl+1 to Tbl+N

total N registers use for store array data.so, if In is bit component ,the maximum

array element can be stored are N*16; If In is regieter ,the maximum array

element can be stored are N. When number of array element exceed the

maximum value of array elements , data con not append into the array .

4. Store queue of the array as follows :

A. Bit component data: if append to array is bit, store queue of the array as

follows:

Array
Array content
component
Number of
Tbl array
element
First array
b0
element
Second array
b1
Tbl+1 element
......
Sixteen array
b15
element
Tbl+2 seventeen
b0 array
element
eighteen array
b1
element
 ...... ......

b0 ......
......
...... ......

B. Register component data: if appended to array is 16 bit register, store queue

of the array as follows:

Array
Array content
component
Number of
Tbl array
element
First array
Tbl+1
element
Second array
Tbl+2
element
Third array
Tbl+3
element
...... ......

[Instruction example]
 [Program description]

1. First scan SM2=ON, start T0 timer(30s).

2. SM5 is clock pulse per second , cycles per second, INC instruction V200 add

1(for simulated data),ATBL instruction append V200 into the array start from V500

, array length is 255.

3. After 30s ,T0=OFF, per second FIFO instruction will be first in first out get data

from array, output to AQ0.

FIFO(First in first out)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
FIFO En, Tbl, Out
format
 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Tbl Array start component √

Eno Enable output √

Out Data output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. FIFO instruction according to first in first out model get out data from array

ATBL , each data be get out array element subtract 1.

2. If number of array elements≤0, then instruction not execute.

3. FIFO instruction cooperate ATBL instruction ready-made first in first out

array,FIFO instruction general executed by edge.

[Instruction example]

Refer to ATBL instruction.

LIFO(Last in first out)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
LIFO En, Tbl, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Tbl Array start component √

Eno Enable output √

Out Data output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. LIFO instruction according to last in first out model get out data from array ATBL

, each data be get out array element subtract 1.

2. If number of array elements≤0, then instruction not execute.

3. LIFO instruction cooperate ATBL instruction ready-made last in first out

array(stack),LIFO instruction general executed by edge.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]
 1. First scan SM2=ON, start T0 timer(30s).

2. SM5 clock pulse per second , cycles per second, INC instruction V200 add 1(for

simulated data), ATBL instruction append V200 into the array start from V500 ,

array length is 255.

3. After 30s,T0=OFF, per second LIFO instruction get out data from array

according to last in first out ,output to AQ0.

SORT(Data sort)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
SORT En, UpDown, Sou, Row, Col, Index, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

Ascending or descending √
UpDown
order control

Sou Source start component √ Occupy Row * Col continuous component

Row Row √ 1~64

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Col Line √ 1~64

Index Arrange sequence √

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √ Occupy Row * Col continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. The data from start Sou Row row Col line total Row×Col elements will be sorted

,sort refer to Index specified line ,sort direction controlled by UpDown, UpDown is

OFF then ascending sort , UpDown is ON then descending sort, data be sorted

store into the first Out total Row×Col elements.

2. SORT instruction be executed edge ,if modified the Sou data after sorted, then

must be retrigger.

3. Must meet Row≥1. Col≥1. Index≤Col, no then instruction not execute.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

If initial data (performance) as follows:

Name
Chinese Math English

Wu V1000=98 V1001=65 V1002=81

Chen V1003=78 V1004=89 V1005=65
Wang V1006=87 V1007=99 V1008=68
 Li V1009=60 V1010=92 V1011=83
Zhang V1012=72 V1013=90 V1014=56

If M100=OFF, when M0=ON, start from V1000 5 row 3 line array ,according to line

2(mathematic performance) use ascending sort , result store into start from V0 5x3

elements.

Name
Chinese Math English

Wu V0=98 V1=65 V2=81

Chen V3=78 V4=89 V5=65
Zhang V6=72 V7=90 V8=56
Li V9=60 V10=92 V11=83
Wang V12=87 V13=99 V14=68

If M100=ON, when M0=ON,start from V1000 5 row 3 line array ,according to line

2(mathematic performance) use descending sort , result store into start from V0

5x3 elements.

Name
Chinese Math English

Wang V0=87 V1=99 V2=68

Li V3=60 V4=92 V5=83
Zhang V6=72 V7=90 V8=56
Chen V9=78 V10=89 V11=65
Wu V12=98 V13=65 V14=81
Data conversion instruction

Data conversion instruction list as follows

Support
Instruction language
8 bit model 32 bit model Instruction function
name
LD FBD IL

ENCO Encoder √ √ √

DECO Decoder √ √ √

BTOW Bit convert to word √ √ √

WTOB Word convert to bit √ √ √

HEX HEX.LB ASCII convert to hexadecimal √ √ √

ASCI ASCI.LB Hexadecimal convert to ASCII √ √ √

BUNB Discrete bit combination to continuous bit √ √ √

BUNW Discrete bit combination to continuous word √ √ √

WUNW Discrete word combination to continuous word √ √ √

BDIB Continuous bit disperse to discrete bit √ √ √

WDIB Continuous word disperse to discrete bit √ √ √

WDIW Continuous word disperse to discrete word √ √ √

BCD D.BCD BIN convert to BCD √ √ √

BIN D.BIN BCD convert to BIN √ √ √

 Support
Instruction language
8 bit model 32 bit model Instruction function
name
LD FBD IL

ITOL Integer convert to long integer √ √ √

GRAY BIN convert to GRAY code √ √ √

GBIN GRAY code convert to BIN √ √ √

ENCO(Encoder)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
ENCO En, Sou, N, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Sou Source start component √

N Number of bits be encoded √ 0~8

Eno Enable output √

Encode
Out √
output

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. ENCO instruction use for obtain the position of the maximum ON bit in Sou data .

2. 0≤N≤8,maximum may encode 2^8=256 bits.

 3.

If the source data have many bits are 1(ON), then only deal with the highest bit

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

1. M0=ON,X0~X7(2^3=8) proceed encode, if X6=ON,X7=OFF other not to matter, then

V0=7.

2. M0=ON,V100 low 8 bits (2^3=8,high 8 bits not use ) proceed encode ,if

V100=2345(00001001 00101001),then V10=6.

DECO(Decoder)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
DECO En, In, N, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √
 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

In Decode input √

N Decode digitals √ 0~8

Eno Enable output √

Decode o
Out √
utput

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. DECO instruction decode N digitals of the In data, result output to Out.

2. 0≤N≤8,maximum may decode output 2^8=256 bits.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

M0=ON,V0 decoded Output to Y0~Y7(2^3=8) and low 8 bits of V100 (2^3=8,high 8

bits total are 0). If V0=7, then among Y0~Y7 only Y6=ON others

OFF,V100=64(00000000 01000000).

BTOW(Bit convert to word)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example
 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
BTOW En, Sou, N, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

Sou Source start component √ Occupy N continuous component

N Convert digitals √ 1~256

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

BTOW instruction convert N bit components start from Sou, convert to integer result

output toOut.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON,X0~X5 convert to integer ,if X1=ON. X2=ON. X5=ON others are

OFF,then V0=38(00000000 00100110).

WTOB (Word convert to bit)

In
struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
WTOB En, In, N, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

In Input √

N Convert digitals √ 1~256

Eno Enable output √

Convert result start c

Out √ Occupy N continuous component
omponent

[Instruction function and effect declare]

WTOB instruction convert N bits of In to output to Out.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON,low 7 bits of V0 convert to Y0~Y6,if V0=38(00000000 00100110),then

Y1=ON. Y2=ON. Y5=ON others are OFF.

HEX. HEX.LB(ASCII convert to hexadecimal)

 In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 8 bit
HEX En, Sou, N, Out

Instruction
HEX.LB En, Sou, N, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

√ HEX occupy (N-1)\2+1 continuous component,HEX.LB

Sou Source start component
occupy N continuous component

Number of characters √
N 1~256
converted

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √ Occupy (N-1)\4+1 continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. HEX instruction convert start from Sou ASCII code to HEX value, number of N

characters will be onverted.

2. 8 bit model instruction HEX.LB only convert low byte of Sou , high byte not use .

3. ASCII code characters only be 0~9 and A. B. C. D. E. F these 6 characters, if there

have illegality characters in Sou then instruction not execute.

[Instruction example]
[Program description]

If initial data (ASCII code data) as follows:

High
C ASCII
Register value low byte value
omponent (ASCII code)
character
(ASCII code)

Low byte 0x38 "8"

V1000 0x3938
Hight byte 0x39 "9"
Low byte 0x41 "A"
V1001 0x4241
Hight byte 0x42 "B"
Low byte 0x34 "4"
V1002 0x3534
Hight byte 0x35 "5"
Low byte 0x32 "2"
V1003 0x3332
Hight byte 0x33 "3"
Low byte 0x45 "E"
V1004 0x4645
Hight byte 0x46 "F"
Low byte 0x39 "9"
V1005 0x3039
Hight byte 0x30 "0"
Low byte 0x31 "1"
V1006 0x3831
Hight byte 0x38 "8"
Low byte 0x43 "C"
V1007 0x4443
Hight byte 0x44 "D"

When M0=ON, start from V1000 ASCII code convert to data ,HEX convert result to

components start form V0 ,HEX.LB only convert to low byte ASCII code of V1000 ,

convert result to start from V10, N=1~8 converted result as follows.

HEX
N HEX.LB

V1 V0 V11 V10
1 0x8 0x8
2 0x89 0x8A
3 0x89A 0x8A4
4 0x89AB 0x8A42
5 0x8 0x9AB4 0x8 0xA42E
6 0x89 0xAB45 0x8A 0x42E9
7 0x89A 0xB452 0x8A4 0x2E91
8 0x89AB 0x4523 0x8A42 0xE91C
 ASCI. ASCI.LB(Hexadecimal convert to ASCII)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 8 bit
ASCI En, Sou, N, Out

Instruction
ASCI.LB En, Sou, N, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Sou Source start component √ Occupy (N-1)\4+1 continuous component

number of character be √
N 1~256
converted

Eno Enable output √

ASCI occupy (N-1)\2+1 continuous

Out Output √
component,ASCI.LB occupy N continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. ASCI instruction convert start from Sou value to ASCII code character , number of

N characters will be converted, convert result stored to start from Out component .

2. 8 bit model instruction ASCI.LB only store convert low byte to low byte of Out

,hight byte is 0.

[Instruction example]
[Program description]

If initial data ( convert to ASCII code)as follows:

c Reg

omponent ister value

V1100 0x4523
V1101 0x89AB

When M1=ON,ASCI instruction convert the value of start from V1100 to ASCII code,

result to start from V100 component,ASCI.LB instruction put the result to start from

V2000 components (Only low byte, hight byte is0),N=1~8 convert ed result as follows

.
In
Out c
struction N
omponent 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
format

Low byte "3" "2" "5" "4" "B" "A" "9" "8"
V100
Hight byte "3" "2" "5" "4" "B" "A" "9"
Low byte "3" "2" "5" "4" "B" "A"
V101
Hight byte "3" "2" "5" "4" "B"
ASCI
Low byte "3" "2" "5" "4"
V102
Hight byte "3" "2" "5"
Low byte "3" "2"
V103
Hight byte "3"
V200 Low byte "3" "2" "5" "4" "B" "A" "9" "8"
V201 Low byte "3" "2" "5" "4" "B" "A" "9"
V202 Low byte "3" "2" "5" "4" "B" "A"
V203 Low byte "3" "2" "5" "4" "B"
ASCI.LB V204 Low byte "3" "2" "5" "4"
V205 Low byte "3" "2" "5"
V206 Low byte "3" "2"
V207 Low byte "3"

BUNB(Discrete bit combination to continuous bit)

 In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
BUNB En, Table, Des
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Table Discrete bit table √

Eno Enable output √

Des Target start component √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

BUNB instruction use for combination the discrete bit which Table define to continuous

bit components .

Discrete bit table: may be called by BUNB. BUNW. BDIB. WDIB instruction Table item.

how to define the discrete bit table please refer to " instruction use table" section.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

If "read discrete bit table" defined as follows:

Bit
Sequence
number
component
 1 X3
2 M10
3 M301
4 S21
5 M77
6 M100
7 X1
8 Y6

When M0=ON,BUNB instruction combine the "read discrete bit table" defined bit to

start from M500 continuous component.

Sequence
number Executed result

1 M500 = X3
2 M501 = M10
3 M502 = M301
4 M503 = S21
5 M504 = M77
6 M505 = M100
7 M506 = X1
8 M507 = Y6

BUNW(Discrete bit combination to continuous word)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
BUNW En, Table, Des
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Table Discrete bit table √

Eno Enable output √

Des Target start component √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

BUNW instruction use for combination the discrete bit which Table define to

continuous word components.

Discrete bit table:May be called by BUNB. BUNW. BDIB. WDIB instruction Table item.

How to define the discrete bit table please refer to " instruction use table" section.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

If "read discrete bit table" defineas follows:

Sequence
number bit component

1 X3
2 M10
3 M301
4 S21
5 M77
6 M100
7 X1
8 Y6

When M1=ON,BUNW instruction combination bitwise "read discrete bit table" defined

bit to start from V0 registers.

Sequence
number Executed result

1 V0.b0 = X3
2 V0.b1 = M10
3 V0.b2 = M301
4 V0.b3 = S21
5 V0.b4 = M77
6 V0.b5 = M100
7 V0.b6 = X1
8 V0.b7 = Y6

WUNW(Discrete word combination to continuous word)

In
struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
WUNW En, Table, Des
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Discrete register component √

Table
table

Eno Enable output √

Des Target start component √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

WUNW instruction use for combination the discrete register which Table define to

continuous register components .

Discrete register component table:May be called by WUNW. WDIW instruction Table

item. How to define discrete register component table please refer to " instruction use

table " section.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

If "read discrete register table " defineas follows:

Sequence
number bit component

1 AI1
2 V10
3 V106
 4 AQ0

When M0=ON, WUNW instruction combination move the "read discrete register table "

defined register to start from V200 continuous component.

Sequence
number Executed result

1 V200 = AI1
2 V201 = V10
3 V202 = V106
4 V203 = AQ0

BDIB(Continuous bit disperse to discrete bit)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
BDIB En, Sou, Table
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Sou Source start component √

Discrete bit component √

Table
table

Eno Enable output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

BDIB instruction use for disperse the bit components start from Sou to discrete bit

components defined by Table.

 Discrete bit table: may be called by BUNB. BUNW. BDIB. WDIB instruction Table item.

How to define the discrete bit table please refer to " instruction use table" section.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

If "write discrete bit table " define as follows:

Bit
Sequence
number
component

1 Y4
2 M10
3 M301
4 S21
5 M77
6 M100
7 Y0
8 Y6

When M0=ON,BDIB instruction combination move the start from M500 continuous bit

to "write discrete bit table " .

Sequence
number Executed result

1 Y4 = M500
2 M10 = M501
3 M301 = M502
4 S21= M503
5 M77= M504
6 M100 = M505
7 Y0 = M506
8 Y6 = M507

WDIB(Continuous word disperse to discrete bit)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example
 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
WDIB En, Sou, Table
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Sou Source start component √

Discrete bit component √

Table
table

Eno Enable output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

WDIB instruction use for disperse the bit components start bitwise from Sou register to

discrete bit components defined by Table.

Discrete bit table: may be called by BUNB. BUNW. BDIB. WDIB instruction Table item.

How to define the discrete bit table please refer to " instruction use table" section.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

If "write discrete bit table " define as follows:

Sequence
number Bit component

1 Y4
2 M10
3 M301
4 S21
5 M77
 6 M100
7 Y0
8 Y6

When M1=ON, WDIB instruction discrete bitwise the start from V0 register to "write

discrete bit table" defined bit components .

Sequence
number Executed result

1 Y4 = V0.b0
2 M10 = V0.b1
3 M301 = V0.b2
4 S21= V0.b3
5 M77= V0.b4
6 M100 = V0.b5
7 Y0 = V0.b6
8 Y6 = V0.b7

WDIW(Continuous word disperse to discrete word)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
WDIW En, Sou, Table
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Sou Source start component √

Discrete register component √

Table
table

Eno Enable output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

 WDIW instruction use for disperse the registers start from Sou register to discrete

registers defined by Table.

Discrete register component table: may be called by WUNW. WDIW instruction Table

item. How to defined discrete register component table please refer to " instruction

use table" section.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

If " write discrete register table" define as follows:

Sequence
number Bit component

1 V90
2 V10
3 V106
4 AQ0

When M0=ON, WDIW instruction discrete the register start from V200 to "read discrete

register table " defined discrete register.

Sequence
number Executed result

1 V90 = V200
2 V10 = V201
3 V106 = V202
4 AQ0 = V203

BCD. D.BCD(BIN convert to BCD)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example
 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16,32 bit
BCD En, In, Out

Instruction
D.BCD En, In, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In Input √

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. BCD instruction (D.BCD is 32 bit instruction) use for convert the value to BCD code.

2. 16 bit instruction value input range is 0~9999,32 bit instruction value input range is

0~99999999,In exceed range then instruction not execute.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON,BCD instruction convert V1000 value to BCD code result to V0,D.BCD

instruction convert V1001V1002 value to result to V10V11,as follows table.

In c
Initial value BCD convert D.BCD convert
omponent result result

V1000 2345 V0 = 0x2345

V1001V1002 48702861 V10V11 =
 0x48702861

BIN. D.BIN(BCD convert to BIN)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
BIN En, In, Out

Instruction
D.BIN En, In, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In Input √

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. BIN instruction (D.BIN is 32 bit instruction) use for convert BCD code to value.

2. BCD code (Binary-coded Decimal) also name binary code decimal numbers. binary-

decimal code or 8421 code, that is expand the decimal number to binary number

according to 8421 model .BCD code is four digit binary code, that is convert decimal

number to binary number , but different from the general convert , each decimal

number 0-9 corresponding a four digit binary code,corresponding relation as follows:

decimal 0 corresponding 0000; decimal 1 corresponding 0001 ....... decimal 9

corresponding 1001, following 10 express in above-mentioned 2 code, decimal 10

express is 00010000, that is BCD code come across 1001 generate carry bit , unlike

general binary code reach 1111 general carry bit 10000.

 3. If In input contain not BCD code (contain 0xA. 0xB. 0xC. 0xD. 0xE. 0xF) then

instruction not execute.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M1=ON,BIN instruction convert the BCD code of V1100 to value result to

V20,D.BIN instruction convert the BCD code of V1101V1102 to value result to

V30V31,as follows table .

In c

omponent Initial value BIN convert result D.BIN convert result

V1100 0x3938 V20 = 3938

V1101V1102 0x35344241 V30V31 = 35344241

ITOL(Integer convert to long integer)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
ITOL En, In, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √
 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

In Input √

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √ Occupy 2 continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

ITOL instruction use for convert 16 bit integer to 32 bit long integer .

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON,ITOL instruction convert V1000 to long integer result to V0V1, convert

V1001 to long integer result to V2V3,as follows table .

In c

omponent Initial value convert result

V1000 4648 V0V1 = 4648

V1001 -16961 V2V3 = -16961

GRAY(BIN convert to GRAY code)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example
 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
GRAY En, In, N, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In is bit component occupy N continuous component, is

In Input √ register component occupy (N-1)\16+1 continuous
component

N GRAY code length √ 1-32

Eno Enable output √

Out is bit component occupy N continuous component, is

Out Output √ register component occupy (N-1)\16+1 continuous
component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. GRAY instruction use for convert value to gray code.

2. In must ＞0 then instruction not execute.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON, convert the low 7 bits of V0 to gray code output to Y0~Y6,convert

M10~M16 to gray code output to V10.

In c Value Convert to gray

omponent code result

 Y0=ON
Y1=OFF
Y2=ON
V0 25 Y3=OFF
Y4=ON
Y5=OFF
Y6=OFF

O
M10
N

M11 OFF
M12 OFF
V10=21

M13 ON
ON
M14

M15 OFF
M16 OFF

GBIN(GRAY code convert to BIN)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
GBIN En, In, N, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In is bit component occupy N continuous component, is

In Input √ register component occupy (N-1)\16+1 continuous
component

N GRAY code length √ 1-32

Eno Enable output √

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Out is bit component occupy N continuous component, is

Out Output √ register component occupy (N-1)\16+1 continuous
component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. GBIN instruction use for convert gray code to value.

2. In must ＞0 then instruction not execute.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M1=ON, convert Y0~Y6 gray code to value output to V20, convert the gray code

of the low 7 bits of V10 to value output to M100~M106.

In c Value Gray

omponent code convert to value

O
Y0
N

Y1 OFF
Y2
ON V20=25

Y3 OFF
ON
Y4

Y5 OFF
Y6 OFF
M100=ON
M101=OFF
M102=OFF
V10 21 M103=ON
M104=ON
M105=OFF
M106=OFF
Character instruction

Character instruction list as follows

Support
Instruction language
8 bit model 32 bit model Instruction function
name
LD FBD IL

GHLB Obtain high low byte √ √ √

GETB Capture byte string √ √ √

BCMP BCMP.LB Byte string comparison √ √ √

ITOC D.ITOC Integer convert to character √ √ √

CTOI Character convert to integer √ √ √

FTOC Floating point convert to character √ √ √

CTOF Character convert to floating point √ √ √

GHLB(Obtain high low byte)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
GHLB En, Sou, N, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Sou Source start component √ Occupy N continuous component

N Number of component √ 1~256

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √ Occupy 2N continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

GHLB instruction separate the high low byte of start from Sou N registers low byte

output to Out.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON, separate high low byte of V1000~V1004 output to V0~V9.

Sou c
Value Output
omponent Output result
component

V0 0x1E
V1000 0x001E
V1 0x00
V2 0x6A
V1001 0xFF6A
V3 0xFF
0x0E19 V4 0x19
V1002
V5 0x0E
V6 0x08
V1003 0x1208
V7 0x12
V8 0x5F
V1004 0x0D5F
V9 0x0D

GETB(Capture byte string)

In
struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
GETB En, Sou, Start, N, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Sou Source start component √ Occupy (Start+N)\2 continuous component

The start byte sequence √

Start
number

N Number of bytes √ 1~256

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √ Occupy (N+1)\2 continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

GETB instruction capture N bytes from start byte of the byte string start from Sou.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON, capture 7 bytes from second byte of the byte string start from V1000

,output to V0~V3.
Sou c Value Output Output result
 omponent component

V1000 0x011E V0 0x6A01

V1001 0xFF6A V1 0x19FF
0x0E19
V1002 V2 0x080E

V1003 0x1208 V3 0x0012

V1004 0x0D5F

BCMP. BCMP.LB(Byte string comparison)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 8 bit
BCMP En, In1, In2, N, Out

Instruction
BCMP.LB En, In1, In2, N, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

√ BCMP occupy (N+1)\2 continuous component, BCMP.LB

In1 Compare byte string 1
occupy N continuous component

√ BCMP occupy (N+1)\2 continuous component, BCMP.LB

In2 Compare byte string 2
occupy N continuous component

N Compare number of bytes √ 1~256

Out Compare result output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

BCMP instruction compare the byte string of In1 and In2,compare n bytes, if equal to

then Out=ON, no then Out=OFF. BCMP.LB is low byte model, only compare low byte

part.
 [Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON, compare byte string V1000~V1004 and byte string V1010~V1014

,BCMP instruction compare 7 bytes,BCMP.LB instruction compare 5 low byte.

In1 c Initial In2 c Initial
value value Compare result
omponent omponent

V1000 0x011E V1010 0x011E

V1001 0xFF6A V1011 0x026A
M100=OFF
0x0E19 0x0019
V1002 V1012
M101=ON
V1003 0x1208 V1013 0x1208
V1004 0x0D5F V1014 0x5D5F

ITOC. D.ITOC(Integer convert to character)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
ITOC En, In, Out

Instruction
D.ITOC En, In, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √
 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

In Input √

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √ Occupy 6 continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

ITOC instruction use for integer convert to character ,D.ITOC use for long integer

convert to character. Output automatic occupy 6 continuous register , total can

express12 characters, if convert result not enough 12 characters then the behind

register filled by the blank space.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON, ITOC convert V1000 integer to character output to V0~V5,D.ITOC

convert V1001V1002 long integer to character output to V10~V15,as follows table .

In c

omponent Initial value convert result

V1000 286 V0~V5 ="286"

V1001V1002 -2584810 V10~V15 =" -2584810"

CTOI(Character convert to integer)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example
 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
CTOI En, Sou, N, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Sou Source start component √ Occupy 6 continuous component

N Convert character number √ N range :1~11

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √ Occupy 2 continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. CTOI use for convert N character start Sou to long integer , if convert result exceed

long integer range then not convert moreover Eno is 0(OFF),Out maintain original not

changed .

2. N is will be converted character number, valid range 1~11,if exceed range then not

convert moreover Eno=OFF, Out maintain original not changed .

3. If will be converted character contain illegal character( except 0 ~ 9. +. - character),

replace space to ahead , lop back .For example: character '123'. '123dfg'. 'A123'

convert result all re integer 123.

[Instruction example]
 [Program description]

When M0=ON, CTOI convert character 7 characters of V1000~V1005 to integer

output to V0V1, convert 9 characters of V1010~V1015 to integer output to V2V3,as

follows table .
In c

omponent Initial value convert result

V1000~V1005 "1234567890" V0V1 =1234567

V1010~V1015 "-987654321" V2V3 =-98765432

FTOC(Floating point convert to character)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
FTOC En, In, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In Input √ Occupy 2 continuous component

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √ Occupy 6 continuous component

 [Instruction function and effect declare]

FTOC instruction use for floating point convert to character.Output automatic occupy 6

continuous register ,total can express12 character, if convert result not enough 12

characters then the behind register filled by the blank space.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON,FTOC use for convert floating point V1000V1001 to character output to

V0~V5, convert floating point V1002V1003 to character output to V10~V15,as follows

table .
In c

omponent Initial value convert result

V1000V1001 23.4567 V0~V5 ="23.4567"

V1002V1003 -2987.56 V10~V15 =" -2987.56"

CTOF(Character convert to floating point)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
CTOF En, Sou, N, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Sou Source start component √ Occupy 6 continuous component

N Convert character number √ N range :1~11

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √ Occupy 2 continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. CTOF convert N characters start from Sou to floating point, if convert result exceed

floating point range then not convert moreover Eno is 0(OFF),Out maintain original

not changed .

2. N is number of character be converted, valid range 1~11, if exceed range then not

convert moreover Eno=OFF,Out maintain original not changed .

3. If the character be converted contain illegal character( except 0 ~ 9. .. +. -

character), eplace space to ahead , lop back .For example: character '1.23'. '1.23dfg'.

'A1.23' convert result all are floating point 1.23.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON,CTOF convert 7 characters of V1000~V1005 to floating point output to

V0V1, convert 9 characters of V1010~V1015 to floating point output to V2V3,as

follows table .
 In c Initial value convert result

omponent

V1000~V1005 "1234.67890" V0V1 =1234.67

V1010~V1015 "-98.654321" V2V3 =-98.65432
Arithmetical instruction

Arithmetical operation instruction list as follows

Support
Instruction language
8 bit model 32 bit model Instruction function
name
LD FBD IL

WNOT D.WNOT Negation √ √ √

WAND D.WAND AND operation √ √ √

WOR D.WOR OR operation √ √ √

WXOR D.WXOR XOR operation √ √ √

ADD D.ADD Addition √ √ √

SUB D.SUB Subtraction √ √ √

INC D.INC Increase 1 √ √ √

DEC D.DEC Decrease 1 √ √ √

MUL D.MUL Multiplication √ √ √

DIV D.DIV Division √ √ √

ACCU D.ACCU Accumulation √ √ √

AVG D.AVG Average √ √ √

ABS D.ABS Absolute value √ √ √

 Support
Instruction language
8 bit model 32 bit model Instruction function
name
LD FBD IL

NEG D.NEG Two's complement √ √ √

WNOT. D.WNOT(Negation)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
WNOT En, In, Out

Instruction
D.WNOT En, In, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In Input √

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

WNOT instruction bitwise negation output.

[Instruction example]
 [Program description]

When M0=ON, execute as follows logical operation,V0= not

V1000;V2V3=V1000V1001 and V1002V1003;V4=V1000 or

V1002;V6V7=V1000V1001 xor V1002V1003,as follows table .

c

omponent Initial value Arithmetic result

V1000 10100111 01010010 V0 =01011000 10101101

V1000V1001 01000001 10111011 10100111 01010010 V2V3 =01000001 00111010 1010000001010010
V1002 10111000 11110110 V4 =10111111 11110110
V1002V1003 11000101 00111010 10111000 11110110 V6V7 =10000100 10000001 00011111 10100100

WAND. D.WAND(AND operation)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
WAND En, In1, In2, Out

Instruction
D.WAND En, In1, In2, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In1 Input1 √

In2 Input2 √

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

WAND instruction use for In1. In2 bitwise logical AND operation output.

[Instruction example]

Refer to WNOT instruction example.

WOR. D.WOR(OR operation)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
WOR En, In1, In2, Out

Instruction
D.WOR En, In1, In2, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In1 Input1 √
 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

In2 Input2 √

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

WOR instruction use for In1. In2 bitwise logical OR operation output.

[Instruction example]

Refer to WNOT instruction example.

WXOR. D.WXOR(XOR operation)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
WXOR En, In1, In2, Out

Instruction
D.WXOR En, In1, In2, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In1 Input1 √

In2 Input2 √

Eno Enable output √

 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

WXOR instruction use for In1. In2 bitwise logical XOR operation output.

[Instruction example]

Refer to WNOT instruction example.

ADD. D.ADD(Addition)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
ADD En, In1, In2, Out

Instruction
D.ADD En, In1, In2, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In1 Augend √

In2 Addend √

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

ADD instruction use for In1 add In2 output to Out.

 [Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON, execute as follows logical operation,V0=

V1000+V1002;V2V3=V1000V1001-V1002V1003;V4V5=V1000*

V1002;V8V9=V1000V1001\ V1002V1003,as follows table .

c

omponent Initial value Arithmetic result

V1000 2702 V0 =2516

V1000V1001 1102776974 V2V3 =1201277768
V1002 -186 V4V5 =-502572
Quotient V8V9 =-11,remainder
V1002V1003 -98500794
V10V11=19268240

SUB. D.SUB(Subtraction)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example
 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
SUB En, In1, In2, Out

Instruction
D.SUB En, In1, In2, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In1 Minuend √

In2 Subtracter √

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

SUB instruction use for In1 subtract In2 output to out.

[Instruction example]

Refer to ADD instruction example.

INC. D.INC(Increase 1)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
INC En, In

Instruction
D.INC En, In
format
 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In Augend √

Eno Enable output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. INC instruction use for In increase 1 again store to In.

2. 16 bit instruction INC,if In=32767,Increase 1 change to -32768.

3. 32 bit instruction D.INC,if In=2147483647,Increase 1 change to -2147483648.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When X0=ON, then V0V1=V0V1+1

DEC. D.DEC(Decrease 1)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
DEC En, In

Instruction
D.DEC En, In
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In Minuend √

Eno Enable output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. DEC instruction use for In decrease 1 again store to In.

2. 16 bit instruction DEC if In=-32768,Increase 1 change to 32767.

3. 32 bit instruction D.DEC if In=-2147483648,Increase 1 change to 2147483647.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When X1=ON, then V2=V2-1

MUL. D.MUL(Multiplication)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
MUL En, In1, In2, Out

Instruction
D.MUL En, In1, In2, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In1 Multiplicand √

In2 Multiplier √

Eno Enable output √

MUL: occupy 2 continuous component,D.MUL: occupy 4

Out Output √
continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

MUL instruction use for In1 multiply by In2 output to out. Out+1,32 bit instruction

D.MUL use for (In1. In1+1) multiply by (In2. In2+1),arithmetic result output to (Out.

Out+1. Out+2. Out+3).

[Instruction example]

Refer to ADD instruction example.

DIV. D.DIV(Division)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
DIV En, In1, In2, Out

Instruction
D.DIV En, In1, In2, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √
 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

In1 Dividend √

In2 Divisor √

Eno Enable output √

DIV: occupy 2 continuous component,D.DIV: occupy 4

Out Output √
continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. 16 bit instruction (DIV), use for In1 divide In2,arithmetic result quotient store to

out ,remainder store to out+1.

2. 32 bit instruction (D.DIV), use for (In1. In1+1) divide (In2. In2+1),arithmetic

result quotient store to (Out. Out+1),remainder store to (Out+2. Out+3).

[Instruction example]

Refer to ADD instruction example.

ACCU. D.ACCU(Accumulation)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
ACCU En, Sou, N, Out

Instruction
D.ACCU En, Sou, N, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √
 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

√ ACCU: occupy N continuous component,D.ACCU: occupy

Sou Source start component
2N continuous component

N Number of data √ 1~256

Eno Enable output √

ACCU: occupy 2 continuous component,D.ACCU: occupy

Out Output √
4 continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. ACCU instruction use for accumulation sum of N 16 bit integer start from Sou

,arithmetic result store to out. Out+1.

2. D.ACCU instruction use for accumulation sum of N 32 bit integer (216 bit

register)start from Sou , arithmetic result store to out. Out+1. Out+2. Out+3.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON,V0V1= V1000+V1001+V1002+V1003,as follows table .

c

omponent Initial value Arithmetic result

V1000 2702
V1001 16827
V0V1 =17839
V1002 -186
V1003 -1504

AVG. D.AVG(Average)

In

struction format and parameter specification

 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
AVG En, Sou, N, Out

Instruction
D.AVG En, Sou, N, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

√ AVG: occupy N continuous component,D.AVG: occupy 2N

Sou Source start component
continuous component

N Number of data √ 1~256

Eno Enable output √

AVG: occupy 2 continuous component,D.AVG: occupy 4

Out Output √
continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. AVG instruction use for get average value N 16 bit integer start from Sou

,arithmetic result store to out, remainder store to Out+1.

2. D.AVG instruction use for get average value N 32 bit integer (two 16 bit register

)start from Sou, arithmetic result store to out. Out+1, remainder store to Out+2.

Out+3.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON,V0= (V1000+V1001+V1002+V1003)\4,as follows table .

 c Initial value Arithmetic result

omponent

V1000 2702
V1001 16827
V0=4459, remainder V1=3
V1002 -186
V1003 -1504

ABS. D.ABS(Absolute value)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
ABS En, In

Instruction
D.ABS En, In
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In Input √

Eno Enable output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

ABS instruction get In absolute value result again store to In.

[Instruction example]
 [Program description]

When M0=ON, get V1000. V1001V1002 absolute value, as follows table .

c

omponent Initial value Absolute value result

V1000 2702 V1000=2702

V1001V1002 -12172869 V1001V1002=12172869

NEG. D.NEG(Two's complement)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
NEG En, In, Out

Instruction
D.NEG En, In, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In Input √

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

NEG instruction get In two's complement.

[Instruction example]
 [Program description]

When M0=ON, get V1000. V1001V1002 two's complement, as follows table .

c

omponent Initial value Two's complement

V1000 2702 V0=-2702

V1001V1002 -12172869 V2V3=12172869

Floating point instruction

Floating point instruction list as follows

Support
Instruction language
8 bit model 32 bit model Instruction function
name
LD FBD IL

FCMP Floating point comparison √ √ √

FZCP Floating point regional comparison √ √ √

FMOV Floating point move instruction √ √ √

FADD Floating point addition √ √ √

FSUB Floating point subtraction √ √ √

FMUL Floating point multiplication √ √ √

FDIV Floating point division √ √ √

 Support
Instruction language
8 bit model 32 bit model Instruction function
name
LD FBD IL

FACCU Floating point accumulation √ √ √

FAVG Floating point average √ √ √

FMAX Floating point maximum √ √ √

FMIN Floating point minimum √ √ √

FTOI Floating point convert to integer √ √ √

ITOF D.ITOF Integer convert to floating point √ √ √

FABS Floating point absolute √ √ √

FSQR Floating point square root √ √ √

FSIN Sine √ √ √

FCOS Cosine √ √ √

FTAN Tangent √ √ √

FASIN Arcsine √ √ √

FACOS Arc cosine √ √ √

FATAN Arctangent √ √ √

FLN Natural logarithm √ √ √

FLOG The base-10 logarithm of a number √ √ √

 Support
Instruction language
8 bit model 32 bit model Instruction function
name
LD FBD IL

FEXP Nature exponential √ √ √

FRAD Angle convert to radian √ √ √

FDEG Radian convert to angle √ √ √

FXY Exponent √ √ √

PLC floating point use IEEE754 standard, use 32 bit express floating point (occupy 2
registers), value range is ±2-126 to ±2+128 also as ±1.1755e-38 to
±3.4028e+38,format as follows:

FCMP(Floating point comparison)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
FCMP En, In1, In2, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √
 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

In1 Input1 √

In2 Input2 √

Out Status output √ Occupy 3 continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

FCMP is floating point comparison instruction, at the same time output ＞. =. ＜

these 3 result.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

1. FCMP instruction get electricity from busbar and always execute.

2. When V0V1>23.456 then M10=ON, when V0V1=23.456 then M11=ON, when

V0V1<23.456 then M12=ON.

FZCP(Floating point regional comparison)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
FZCP En, In, Up, Down, Out
format
 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In Input √

Up Region upper limit √

Down Region lower limit √

Out Status output √ Occupy 3 continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. FZCP is floating point regional comparison instruction, at the same time output

＞. =. ＜ these 3 result.

2. If region upper limit< region lower limit, then instruction automatic swap they .

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

1. FZCP instruction get electricity from busbar and always execute.

2. When V0V1>9876.05 then M10=ON, when V0V1≤9876.05 moreover

V0V1≥-23.12 then M11=ON, when V0V1<-23.12 then M12=ON.

FMOV(Floating point move)

In

struction format and parameter specification

 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
FMOV En, In, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In Input √

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

Floating point move instruction FMOV also name floating point valuation

instruction,use for assigned floating point valuate to output register Out.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

Program first scan valuate initial value,V0V1=35.6,V10V11=-2.632.

FADD(Floating point addition)

In

struction format and parameter specification

 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
FADD En, In1, In2, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In1 Augend √

In2 Addend √

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

FADD instruction use for floating point In1 add floating point In2 output to out.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]
 When M0=ON,excete as follows floating point arithmetic,V0V1=

V1000V1001+V1002V1003;V2V3=V1000V1001-

V1002V1003;V4V5=V1000V1001* V1002V1003;V6V7=V1000V1001\

V1002V1003,as follows table .

c

omponent Initial value Arithmetic result

V0V1 =-963.7429
V1000V1001 23.38015
V2V3 =1010.503
V4V5 =-23079.09
V1002V1003 -987.123
V6V7 =-0.02368515

FSUB(Floating point subtraction)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
FSUB En, In1, In2, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In1 Minuend √

In2 Subtrahend √

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √
 [Instruction function and effect declare]

FSUB instruction use for floating point In1 subtracte floating point In2 output to

out.

[Instruction example]

Refer to FADD instruction example.

FMUL(Floating point multiplication)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
FMUL En, In1, In2, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In1 Multiplicand √

In2 Multiplier √

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

FMUL instruction use for floating point In1 multiply by floating point In2 output to

out.
 [Instruction example]

Refer to FADD instruction example.

FDIV(Floating point division)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
FDIV En, In1, In2, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In1 Dividend √

In2 Divisor √

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

FDIV instruction use for floating point In1 divide floating point In2 output to out.

[Instruction example]

Refer to FADD instruction example.

FACCU(Accumulation)
 In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
FACCU En, Sou, N, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Sou Source start component √

N Number of data √ 1~256

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

FACCU instruction use for accumulation sum of N floating point start from Sou

,arithmetic result store to out.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON,V0V1= V1000V1001+V1002V1003+V1004V1005+V1006V1007,as

follows table .
 c Initial value Arithmetic result

omponent

V1000V1001 198.012
V1002V1003 23.781
V0V1 =316.4277
V1004V1005 -3.714
V1006V1007 98.3487

FAVG(Average)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
FAVG En, Sou, N, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Sou Source start component √

N Number of data √ 1~256

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

FAVG instruction use for get floating point average value N floating point start from

Sou ,arithmetic result store to out.

[Instruction example]
 [Program description]

When M0=ON,V0V1=

(V1000V1001+V1002V1003+V1004V1005+V1006V1007)\4,as follows table .

c

omponent Initial value Arithmetic result

V1000V1001 198.012
V1002V1003 23.781
V0V1=79.10693
V1004V1005 -3.714
V1006V1007 98.3487

FMAX(Floating point maximum)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
FMAX En, Sou, N, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

Sou Source start component √

N Number of data √ 2~256

 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Eno Enable output √

Out Compare result output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

FMAX instruction compare N floating point data start from Sou ,maximum output

to Out.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

1. M0=ON, if V1000V1001=198.012. V1002V1003=23.781. V1004V1005=-3.714.

V1006V1007=98.3487, then V0V1=198.012.

2. When M0=OFF, instruction stop execute ,Out remain unchanged.

FMIN(Floating point minimum)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
FMIN En, Sou, N, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

Sou Source start component √

N Number of data √ 2~256

Eno Enable output √

Out Compare result output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

FMIN instruction compare N floating point data start from Sou ,minimum output to

Out.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

1. M0=ON, if V1000V1001=198.012. V1002V1003=23.781. V1004V1005=-3.714.

V1006V1007=98.3487, then V0V1=-3.714.

2. When M0=OFF, instruction stop execute ,Out remain unchanged.

FTOI(Floating point convert to integer)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example
 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
FTOI En, In, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In Input √

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

FTOI instruction convert floating point to integer.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON,FTOI instruction convert floating point V1000V1001 to integer

result to V0V1,as follows table .

In c

omponent Initial value convert result

V1000V1001 -2345.987 V0V1 = -2346

ITOF. D.ITOF(Integer convert to floating point)

In

struction format and parameter specification

 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
ITOF En, In, Out

Instruction
D.ITOF En, In, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In Input √

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

ITOF instruction convert Integer to floating point.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON, ITOF instruction convert V1000 to floating point result store to

V0V1, convert V1000V1001 to floating point result store to V2V3,as follows table

.
In c

omponent Initial value convert result

V1000 4648 V0V1 = 4648.0

V1000V1001 -257496 V2V3 = -257496.0
 FABS(Floating point absolute)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
FABS En, In
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In Input √

Eno Enable output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

FABS instruction get floating point In absolute value result again store to In.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON, get floating point V1000V1001 absolute value, as follows table .
c

omponent Initial value Absolute value result

V1000V1001 -23.3456 V1000V1001=23.3456

FSQR(Floating point square root)

 In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
FSQR En, In, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In Input √

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

FSQR instruction get floating point square root.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON, get floating point V1000V1001 square root,as follows table .
c

omponent Initial value Result

V1000V1001 23.3456 V0V1=4.831728

FSIN(Sine)
 In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
FSIN En, Angle, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Angle Angle √

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

FSIN instruction get sine of angle.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]
 When M0=ON, get sine of floating point V1000V1001, cosine of floating point

V1002V1003, tangent of floating point V1004V1005 ,as follows table .

c

omponent Initial value Result

V1000V1001 30.0 SineV0V1=0.5

V1002V1003 45.0 CosineV2V3=0.7071068
V1004V1005 70.0 TangentV4V5=2.747478

FCOS(Cosine)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
FCOS En, Angle, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

A
Angle √
ngle

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

FCOS instruction get cosine of angle.

[Instruction example]

Refer to FSIN instruction example.

 FTAN(Tangent)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
FTAN En, Angle, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

A
Angle √
ngle

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

FTAN instruction get tangent of angle.

[Instruction example]

Refer to FSIN instruction example.

FASIN(Arcsine)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example
 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
FASIN En, In, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In Input √ range :-1 ~ 1

Eno Enable output √

Out Output radian √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

FASIN instruction get arcsine of In .InInput range :-1 ~ 1 among, if In exceed range

, instruction not execute, Eno=OFF.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON, get arcsine floating point V1000V1001 , arc cosine of floating point

V1002V1003, arc tangent of floating point V1004V1005, as follows table .

c Initial value Result

omponent
 V1000V1001 0.8912 Arcsine V0V1=1.099984
V1002V1003 -0.3409 Arccosine V2V3=1.91867
V1004V1005 23.0912 Arctangent V4V5=1.527517

FACOS(Arc cosine)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
FACOS En, In, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In Input √ range :-1 ~ 1

Eno Enable output √

Out Output radian √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

FACOS instruction get arc cosine of In .InInput range :-1 ~ 1 among , if In exceed

range , instruction not execute, Eno=OFF.

[Instruction example]

Refer to FASIN instruction example.

FATAN(Arctangent)

In

struction format and parameter specification

 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
FATAN En, In, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In Input √

Eno Enable output √

Out Output radian √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

FATAN instruction get arc tangent of In.

[Instruction example]

Refer to FASIN instruction example.

FLN(Natural logarithm)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
FLN En, In, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √
Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

In Input √

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

FLN instruction get natural logarithm of In .InInput must greater than 0, no then

instruction not execute, Eno=OFF.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON, get natural logarithm of floating point V1000V1001, the base-10

logarithm of floating point V1002V1003, nature exponential of floating point

V1004V1005,as follows table .

c

omponent Initial value Result

V1000V1001 0.8912 Natural logarithmV0V1=-0.1151864

the base-10 logarithm of
V1002V1003 3.8912
V2V3=0.5900835
V1004V1005 2.2398 Nature exponentialV4V5=9.391453

FLOG(The base-10 logarithm of a number)

In
struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
FLOG En, In, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In Input √

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

FLOG instruction get the base-10 logarithm of In. In Input must greater than 0, no

then instruction not execute, Eno=OFF.

[Instruction example]

Refer to FLN instruction example.

FEXP(Nature exponential)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
FEXP En, In, Out
format
 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In Input √

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

FEXP instruction get n ature exponential of In. In Input must less than 88.72284,

no then instruction not execute, Eno=OFF.

[Instruction example]

Refer to FLN instruction example.

FRAD(Angle convert to radian)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
FRAD En, Angle, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Angle Angle √

Eno Enable output √

 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Out Output radian √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

FRAD instruction convert angle to radian.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON, convert angle V1000V1001to radian, convert radian V1002V1003

to angle, as follows table .

c

omponent Initial value Result

V1000V1001 30.0 V0V1=0.5235988

V1002V1003 1.57 V2V3=89.95438

FDEG(Radian convert to angle)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
FDEG En, In, Angle
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Input
In √
radian

Eno Enable output √

A
Angle √
ngle

[Instruction function and effect declare]

FDEG instruction convert radian convert to angle.

[Instruction example]

Refer to FRAD instruction example.

FXY(Exponent )

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
FXY En, X, Y, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

X Base number √
Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Y Exponent √

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

FXY instruction get X^Y value. If X=0 moreover Y≤0 or X<0 moreover Y magnitude

portion not equal to 0 instruction not execute, Eno=OFF.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON, get V1000V1001^V1002V1003 value.

component Initial value Result
V1000V1001 30.0
V0V1=208.4877
V1002V1003 1.57
Clock instruction

System clock instruction list as follows

Support
Instruction language
8 bit model 32 bit model Instruction function
name
LD FBD IL

TCMP Real time clock comparison √ √ √

TACCU Time accumulative total √ √ √

SCLK Setup system clock √ √ √

TIME Time switch √ √ √

DATE Date switch √ √ √

INVT Count down √ √ √

TCMP(Real time clock comparison)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
TCMP En, Clock, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

Clock compare start c

Clock √ Occupy 6 continuous component
omponent

Out Status output √ Occupy 3 continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. TCMP use for compare system real time clock and clock setup clock ,if system

real time clock ＞clock output＞state, if system real time clock =clock output=state,

if system real time clock ＜clock output＜state.

2. Clock occupy 6 registers, respectively is year(0~9999). month(1~12).

data(1~31). time(0~23). minute(0~59). second(0~59). if year set in 0~99 range ,

system default is 2000~2099 year.

3. If clock is invalid time, instruction not execute.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

1. TCMP instruction get electricity from busbar and always execute.

2. If V1000=2012. V1001=12. V1002=25. V1003=8. V1004=0. V1005=0, express

setting time is 2012-12-25 8:0:0.

3. System clock exit in SV12~SV18, when system real time clock ＞Clock then

M10=ON, when system real time clock =clock then M11=ON, when system real
 time clock ＜clock then M12=ON.

TACCU(Time accumulative total)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
TACCU En, Rst, CT
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Rst Reset √

Eno Enable output √

CT Accumulative time √ Occupy 6 continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. TACCU instruction according to second unit accumulative En=ON time, output

total accumulative second(CT. CT+1) and accumulative data (CT+2). hour(CT+3).

minute(CT+4). second(CT+5) relative to the accumulative second.

2.

Accumulative time

CT must use power-off preserve area register, default power-off preserve registers are
V1000~V2047.
 3. After accumulative second(CT. CT+1) reach maximum value 2147483647

automatic reset to 0.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

1. Network 1 get electricity from busbar , that is accumulative PLC running time .

2. Network 2 If X0 is equipmentx running feedback signal ,X0=ON, TACCU

execute timing ,X0=OFF then not timing.

SCLK(Setup system clock)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
SCLK En, Clock
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Clock Clock data start component √ Occupy 6 continuous component

 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Eno Enable output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. SCLK instruction modify the PLC real time clock by the set clock data .

2. Clock occupy 6 register, respectively is year(0~9999). month(1~12).

data(1~31). hour(0~23). minute(0~59). second(0~59). if year set in0~99 range ,

system default is 2000~2099 year.

3. If clock is invalid time, instruction not execute.

4. SCLK instruction executed by edge.

5. Also can modify by program software menu[PLC/ set PLC clock], must not

program. refer to "set PLC clock"

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

1. If V1000=2012. V1001=12. V1002=25. V1003=8. V1004=0. V1005=0, express

setting time is 2012-12-25 8:0:0.

2. When M0=ON,PLC system clock setup is 2012-12-25 8:0:0.

TIME(Time switch)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example
 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
TIME En, OnTime, OffTime, Act, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

ON
OnTime √
actuation time

OffTime OFF actuation time √

Act Control model √

Out Status output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. TIME instruction use week as control cycle, get by set ON. OFF actuation time

control output.

2. Act is control model, it bits b0~b6 respectively are express monday~sunday

control model, when it relevant bit is1 then express the data ON. OFF actuation

time is valide, is 0 then express the data not actuation.

3. If ON actuation time <OFF actuation time , express in current data ON and OFF.

if ON actuation time >OFF actuation time , express cross-day ON and OFF.

4. Ontime. Offtime if is register input, then high byte is hour(0~23) low byte is

minute(0~59);if is constant input, input format is :hh:mm(as 8 clock 5 minute,input

08:05).
 5. If Ontime is invalid time then ON actuation invalid. If Offtime is invalid time then

OFF actuation invalid.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

Act=127(01111111) express monday ~sunday valid, when M0=ON,TIME instruction

execute, every day 8:30~16:30 among Y0=ON, others timeY0=OFF.

DATE(Date switch)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
DATE En, OnDate, OffDate, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

OnDate ON actuation data √

OffDate OFF actuation data √

Out Status output √

 [Instruction function and effect declare]

1. DATE instruction use year as control cycle, get by ON. OFF actuation time

control output.

2. If ON actuation data <OFF actuation data , express in current year ON and

OFF. if ON actuation data >OFF actuation data , express in cross-year ON and

OFF.

3. OnDate. OffDate if is register input, then high byte is month(1~12) low byte is

data(1~31); if is constant input, input format is :mm-dd(as august 5,Input 08-05).

4. If OnDate is invalid data then ON actuation invalid. If OffDate is invalid data then

OFF actuation invalid .

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON ,DATE instruction executing, from current year august 1to next year

january 31Y0=ON, others time Y0=OFF.

INVT(Count down)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
INVT En, Clock, Out, Rtv
format
 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Count down start time √

Clock Occupy 6 continuous component
component

Out Count down to output √

Rtv Remaining time √ Occupy 4 continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. INVT instruction according to set

count down time

clock calculate from current value to set time still remaining data(Rtv). hour(Rtv+1).
minute(Rtv+2). second(Rtv+3),when reach the timing time output Out.

2. Clock occupy 6 registers ,respectively year(0~9999). month(1~12). data(1~31).

time(0~23). minute(0~59). second(0~59). if year set in 0~99 range , system

default as 2000~2099 year.

3. if Clock is invalid time, instruction not execute.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

1. If V1000=2013. V1001=12. V1002=25. V1003=8. V1004=0. V1005=0, express

set count down time is 2013-12-25 8:0:0.

2. When M0=ON,INVT instruction start count down, automatic calculate from

current value to 2013-12-25 8:0:0 remaining data. hour. minute. second, after
 timing time reach output Y0=ON.

Communication instruction

Communication instruction list as follows

Support
Instruction language
8 bit model 32 bit model Instruction function
name
LD FBD IL

SUM SUM.LB SUM verify √ √ √

BCC BCC.LB BCC verify √ √ √

CRC CRC.LB CRC verify √ √ √

LRC LRC.LB LRC verify √ √ √

COMM COMM.LB Serial communications √ √ √

MODR Modbus read √ √ √

MODW Modbus write √ √ √

HWRD Speedbus read √ √ √

HWWR Speedbus write √ √ √

RCV Receive communication data √ √ √

XMT XMT.LB Sent communication data √ √ √

FROM Extend module CR register read √ √ √

 Support
Instruction language
8 bit model 32 bit model Instruction function
name
LD FBD IL

TO Extend module CR register write √ √ √

TCPMDR Modbus TCP read √ √ √

TCPMDW Modbus TCP write √ √ √

TCPHWR Speedbus TCP read √ √ √

TCPHWW Speedbus TCP write √ √ √

Note:PLC support standard Modbus protocol. Speedbus protocol. freedom

communication protocol, PLC use as slave no need any communication

program, upper computer (configuration software. touch panel. text display

etc. HMI) can direct use Modbus protocol access PLC. refer to

"communication address code table "

PLC communication main features

1. Speedbus protocol is a efficient . high speed communication protocol, support

disperse . blended data transfer, communication efficient very well.

2. PLC support maximum 5 communication port, the same function of all

communication port , all can use for program . upload download program. monitor

. networking.

3. 5 communication port fully independent , concurrent working , support different

different baud rate . different protocol format . different manufacturer equipment

connected in same network.

 4. Need not worry about communication port collision problem, need not control

communication instruction execute time sequence ,all communication instruction

can concurrent get electricity execute.

5. Via communication instruction Out item can intuitive judgment communicate

succeed or not , can use it for alarm the communicate fail between slave.

6. PLC communication is zero spare on network physics level , if slave equipment

not support so high speed communication, can assigned SV141 to insert a interval

among the communication instruction.

SUM. SUM.LB(SUM verify)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 8 bit
SUM En, Sou, N, Out

Instruction
SUM.LB En, Sou, N, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

√ SUM: occupy (N+1)\2 continuous component,SUM.LB:

Sou Source start component
occupy N continuous component

N Verify number of bytes √ 1~256

Eno Enable output √

SUM verify
Out √
code output
 [Instruction function and effect declare]

Sum verify code computing method: use for get accumulation sum start from Sou

N number of bytes , get low byte, exceed 256 part overflow.SUM.LB is Low byte

model, only calculate sum verify code of low byte, high byte notuse .

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON, calculate SUM verify code, as follows table .

Sou c
Initial value
omponent SUM Output SUM.LB Output

V1000 0x8181
V1001 0x0152
V1002 0x0000 V0=0xB3 V2=0x30
V1003 0x0153
V1004 0x0D0A

BCC. BCC.LB(BCC verify)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 8 bit
BCC En, Sou, N, Out

Instruction
BCC.LB En, Sou, N, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

√ BCC: occupy (N+1)\2 continuous component,BCC.LB:

Sou Source start component
occupy N continuous component

N verify sumber of bytes √ 1~256

Eno Enable output √

Out BCC code output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

BCC verify code computing method: use for XOR operation start from Sou N

Number of bytes .BCC.LB is Low byte model, only calculate low byte BCC verify

code, high byte not use.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON, calculate BCC verify code, as follows table .

Sou c
Initial value BCC Output BCC.LB Output
omponent

V1000 0x8181
V1001 0x0152
V1002 0x0000 V0=0xB V2=0x8A
V1003 0x0153
V1004 0x0D0A

CRC. CRC.LB(CRC verify)

 In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 8 bit
CRC En, Sou, N, Out

Instruction
CRC.LB En, Sou, N, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

√ CRC: occupy (N+1)\2 continuous component,CRC.LB:

Sou Source start component
occupy N continuous component

N Verify number of bytes √ 1~256

Eno Enable output √

Out CRC code output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

CRC calculate CRC verify code start from Sou N number of bytes .CRC.LB is
Low byte model, only calculate low byte CRC verify code, high byte not use.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]
 When M0=ON, calculate CRC verify code, as follows table .
Sou c
Initial value
omponent CRC Output CRC.LB Output

V1000 0x8181
V1001 0x0152
V2=0xB4
V1002 0x0000 V0=0x98AC
V3=0x51
V1003 0x0153
V1004 0x0D0A

LRC. LRC.LB(LRC verify)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 8 bit
LRC En, Sou, N, Out

Instruction
LRC.LB En, Sou, N, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

√ LRC: occupy (N+1)\2 continuous component,LRC.LB:

Sou Source start component
occupy N continuous component

N Verify number of bytes √ 1~256

Eno Enable output √

Out LRC code output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

 LRC verify code computing method: use for get accumulation sum start from Sou

N number of bytes and then O 2's complement code. LRC.LB is low byte model,

only calculate low byte LRC verify code, high byte not use.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON, calculate LRC verify code,as follows table .

Sou c
Initial value
omponent LRC Output LRC.LB Output

V1000 0x8181
V1001 0x0152
V2=0xD0
V1002 0x0000 V0=0xFE4D
V3=0xFE
V1003 0x0153
V1004 0x0D0A

COMM. COMM.LB(Serial communications)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 8 bit COMM En, Txd, Tn, Rn, Ptotocol, Port, Out, Err, Rxd

Instruction COMM.LB En, Txd, Tn, Rn, Ptotocol, Port, Out, Err,
format Rxd
Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Txd Send data start component √

Tn Send data number of bytes √ 0~512

Receive data number of √

Rn 0~512
bytes

Protocol Communication protocol √

Port Communication port √

Communication complete
Out √
output

Err Error indication √

Receive data start

Rxd √
component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. When PLC communicate in freedom protocol between external equipment,use

COMM instruction send and receive data .At the moment PLC is master, external

equipment is slave.

2. When Tn=0 ,COMM instruction only receive data without send data .When Rn=0

,COMM instruction only send data without receive data .When Tn=Rn=0 ,COMM

instruction not execute.

3. COMM instruction executing, in accordance with protocol defined

communication format ( baud rate . data bit . stop bit . verification mode) use for

Txd start Tn number of bytes data send to Port assigned serial port ,after send
 complete , if Rn＞0 then automatic go to receive state, receive complete Out=ON,

received data put on Rxd; if Rn=0 then not receive data Out=ON, system execute

next communication instruction. if communication instruction not complete then

Err=ON.

4. COMM instruction have two modes send data: high low byte send mode

(COMM) and only send low byte mode (COMM.LB)

5. COMM instruction can use with XMT. MODR. MODW. HWRD. HWWR

instruction at the same time .but can not use the same communication port with

RCV instruction .

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

1. According to AI-708M itinerant detector communication protocol ,read 3 channel

measure value from AI-708M itinerant detector communication instruction put on

initial register value table " read AI-708M itinerant detector command" :
In Declare
 component itial value

V1000 0x8383
V1001 0x0152 First channel read
V1002 0x0000 command
V1003 0x0155
V1004 0x8484
V1005 0x0152 Second channel read
V1006 0x0000 command
V1007 0x0156
V1008 0x8585
V1009 0x0152 Third channel read
V1010 0x0000 command
V1011 0x0157

2. 3 COMM instruction get electricity from busbar and always execute, PLC

automatic in sequence send communication command to AI-708M itinerant

detector moreover use for returned measure value output to instruction Rxd.

3. Do not warry about communication port conflict , do not control communication

instruction executed time sequence , system automatic executed completely .

MODR(Modbus read)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction MODR En, Slave, Code, Read, N, Ptotocol, Port, Out,

format Rxd

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Slave Slave equipment address √

Code Function code √

Read Read data start address √

N Number of data √ 1~127

Protocol Communication protocol √

Port Communication port √

Communication complete
Out √
Output

Receive data start

Rxd √ Occupy N continuous component
component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. MODR instruction use for communication with all the third party equipment are

support Modbus protocol.

2. When PLC communication with external equipment by the serial port ,use

MODR instruction read data from external equipment . This moment PLC as

master ,external equipment as slave.

3. MODR instruction do not write any verify code, it automatic verified the returned

data ,verify correct Out=ON, read data put on Rxd.

4. MODR instruction can use with COMM . XMT. MODW. HWRD. HWWR

instruction at the same time .but can not use the same communication port with

RCV instruction.
 [Instruction example]

[Program description]

1. MODR instruction read station 1 external module (If module is S04AI) 4 channel

measured value (CR Parameter no.16~19), read data store to V0~V3.

2. Different model module the CR number not the same, detail information refer to

Hardware manual" extend module Parameter" section.

MODW(Modbus write)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction MODW En, Slave, Code, Write, Val, N, Ptotocol, Port,

format Out

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √
Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Slave Slave equipment address √

Code Function code √

Write Write target start address √

Be rote data
Val √ Occupy N continuous component
start component

N Number of data √ 1~127

Protocol Communication protocol √

Port Communication port √

Communication complete
Out √
Output

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. MODW instruction use for communication with all the third party equipment are

support Modbus protocol.

2. When PLC communication with external equipment by the serial port ,use

MODW instruction write data to external equipment . This moment PLC as master

,external equipment as slave Modbus .

3. MODW instruction do not write any verify code, it automatic verified the returned

data ,verify correct Out=ON express write succeed.

4. MODW instruction can use with COMM . XMT. MODR. HWRD. HWWR

instruction at the same time .but can not use the same communication port with

RCV instruction.

[Instruction example]
 [Program description]

1. According to inovance inverter communication protocol ( please refer to

inovance inverter manual part of communication), preset frequency Modbus

address is 4096,MODW instruction write V80 value to inverter real time.

2. Running frequency Modbus address is 4097,MODR instruction read the current

frequency of the inverter store to V82 .

HWRD(Speedbus read)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
HWRD En, Slave, Table, Port, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Slave Slave equipment address √

Speedbus read √
Table
communication table

Port Communication port √

Communication complete
Out √
Output

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. HWRD instruction according to defined "Speedbus read communication table "

automatic swap the data with slave .

2. Speedbus protocol support disperse . blended data transfer, communication

efficient very well.

3. HWRD instruction can use with COMM . XMT. MODR. MODW. HWWR

instruction at the same time .but can not use the same communication port with

RCV instruction .

[Instruction example]

[Program description]
 1. Define Speedbus read communication table " read 2# PLC data "as follows:
Sequence
number Read data from
Write date to slave
slave

1 X0 M10
2 X3 M11
3 V11 V80
4 V12 V81
5 AI0 V20
6 AI1 V21

2. Define Speedbus write communication table " write 2# PLC data "as follows:

Sequence
number Read data from Write date to slave
slave

1 X0 M100
2 X1 M101
3 V0 V100
4 V50 V102
5 Y4 M0
6 Y5 Y0
7 V60 V200
8 V61 V201

3. HWRD. HWWR instruction get electricity from busbar and always execute,

according above define Speedbus read (write) communication table ,automatic

swap data with 2#PLC .

HWWR(Speedbus write)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
HWWR En, Slave, Table, Port, Out
format
 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Slave Slave equipment address √

Speedbus write √
Table
communication table

Port Communication port √

Communication complete
Out √
Output

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. HWWR instruction according to define "Speedbus write communication table "

automatic swap data with slave.

2. Speedbus protocol support disperse . blended data transfer, communication

efficient very well.

3. HWWR instruction can use with COMM . XMT. MODR. MODW. HWRD

instruction at the same time .but can not use the same communication port with

RCV instruction .

[Instruction example]

Refer to HWRD instruction example.

RCV(Receive communication data)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example
 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
RCV En, Schr, Echr, Rn, Ptotocol, Port, Out, Rxd
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Schr start character √

Echr ending character √

Receive data Number of √

Rn 0~512
bytes

Protocol Communication protocol √

Port Communication port √

Communication complete
Out √
Output

Receive data start

Rxd √
component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. At upper computer is communication master ,PLC is communication slave ,

moreover upper computer must use freedom communication protocol need use

RCV instruction.
 2. RCV instruction passive receiving data sent from upper computer , if need

response to upper computer then use XMT instruction sent the response data.

3. Schr is start character define, if Schr=0 express no start character, if Schr high

byte=0 low byte<>0 express only one start character (e.x.Schr=0x003A,start

character is 0x3A), if Schr high byte<>0 express2start character (e.x.

Schr=0x833A,start character is 0x3A. 0x83).

4. Echr is ending character define, if Echr=0 express no ending character, if Echr

high byte=0 low byte<>0 express only one ending character (e.x. Echr=0x000D,

ending character is 0x0D), if Echr high byte<>0 express2 ending character (e.x.

Echr=0x0A0D, ending character is 0x0D. 0x0A).

5. If define start character or ending character ,RCV according to start character.

ending character process match , only match correct express communication

succeed , receive data output to Rxd;When Schr and Echr all is 0,that is start

character and ending character all not define, then RCV instruction use for

according to communication port communicate overtime to judge the start end of

the communication frame .When receive the first byte of a new frame or

communicate overtime RCV instruction will automatic reset Out and Rxd.

6. Rn is receive data number of bytes, e.x. :RCV instruction want receive 22 bytes

send from upper computer , then assign Rn=22.Note: if the length of the

command send from upper computer not fixed, then use for receive number of

bytes define to 0, express disregard receive number of bytes.

7. One communication port only use one RCV instruction, moreover use with

COMM. MODR. MODW. HWRD. HWWR instructionuse at the same

communication port .

[Instruction example]
[Program description]

1. Network 1 start one RCV passive receiving instruction, start character match

0x3A, ending character match 0x0D 0x0A, receive 4 number of bytes,

communication format 19200,n,8,2, communication port 2,receive data put on

V0V1,receive data correct then each communicate M0=ON.

2. When M0=ON receive data correct, compare second byte (V0 high byte), if

equal to 1 then execute XMT instruction return V1000V1001 , if equal to 2 then

execute XMT instruction return V100~V102, if equal to 3 then execute XMT

instruction return V200~V203.

XMT. XMT.LB(Sent communication data)

In
struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 8 bit
XMT En, Txd, Tn, Ptotocol, Port, Out

Instruction
XMT.LB En, Txd, Tn, Ptotocol, Port, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Txd Send data start component √

Tn Send data Number of bytes √ 0~512

Protocol Communication protocol √

Port Communication port √

Communication complete
Out √
Output

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. At upper computer is communication master ,PLC is communication slave ,

moreover upper computer must use freedom communication protocol need use

XMT instruction.

2. XMT instruction general use for cooperate RCV instruction , RCV instruction

receive data send from upper computer , if need response to upper computer then

use XMT instruction send response data.

 3. XMT instruction have two send modes :high low byte send mode (XMT) and

only send low byte mode (XMT.LB).

4. XMT instruction can repeat ,XMT instruction different from COMM instruction ,it

only can send data can not receive data .

[Instruction example]

Refer to RCV instruction example.

FROM(Extend module CR register read)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
FROM En, Slot, CR, N, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

Slot Module position number √

Cr CR register be read √

N Number of CR be read √ 1~120

Eno Enable output √

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Out Return start component √ Occupy N continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. FROM use for read extend module parameter get by parallel bus in program .

2. PLC automatic allocation extend module IO channel corresponding component

address on parallel bus, moreover real time refresh IO of extend module , so

general not use FROM instruction.detail refer to "PLC hardware configure "

section.

3. Different model extend module CR register not the same ,detail refer to

hardware manual "extend module parameter" section.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

1. When M0=ON, read first extend module (if module model is S04AI) 4 Input

channel measure value .

2. When M1=ON, modify the zero point corrected value to 30 (If V1000=30)of first

channel of the extend module .

TO(Extend module CR register write)

 In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
TO En, Slot, CR, Val, N
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

Module position number

Slot √

Cr CR register be wrote √

Data
Val √ Occupy N continuous component
start component be wrote

N Number of CR be wrote √ 1~120

Eno Enable output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. TO use for write extend module parameter get by parallel bus in program. May

"PLC hardware configure " window configure module parameter, when PLC

program be downloaded automatic download ,So general need not use TO

instruction.
 2. Different model extend module CR register not the same ,detail refer to

hardware manual "extend module parameter" section.

[Instruction example]

Refer to FROM instruction example.

TCPMDR(Modbus TCP read)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
TCPMDR En, IP, Code, Read, N, Slave, Out, Rxd
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

IP Slave equipment IP address √

Code Function code √

Read Read data start address √

N Number of data √ 1~127

Slave Slave equipment address √

 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Communication complete
Out √
Output

Receive data start

Rxd √ Occupy N continuous component
component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

TCPMDR instruction is used for reading the data of the device supporting Modbus

TCP protocol.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

1. TCPMDR instruction will read the four channels' measurement value (CR

parameters No. 16 to 19) of the remote module of the IP address 192.168.1.111 ,

and then the reading data will be stored in V0 ~ V3.

2. Different model module the CR number not the same, detail information refer to

Hardware manual" extend module Parameter" section.

TCPMDW(Modbus TCP write)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example
 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
TCPMDW En, IP, Code, Write, Val, N, Slave, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

IP Slave equipment IP address √

Code Function code √

Write Write target start address √

Be rote data
Val √ Occupy N continuous component
start component

N Number of data √ 1~127

Slave Slave equipment address √

Communication complete
Out √
Output

[Instruction function and effect declare]

TCPMDW instruction writes the data to the device supporting the Modbus TCP

protocol.

[Instruction example]
 [Program description]

1. TCPMDW instruction writes the data V0 ~ V3 to the four output channels (CR

parameters No. 16 to 19) of the remote module of the IP address 192.168.1.111.

2. Different model module the CR number not the same, detail information refer to

Hardware manual" extend module Parameter" section.

TCPHWR(Speedbus TCP read)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
TCPHWR En, IP, Table, Slave, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

IP Slave equipment IP address √

Speedbus read √
Table
communication table
Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Slave Slave equipment address √

Communication complete
Out √
Output

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. TCPHWR instruction automatically exchanged the data with the slave device

according to the definition of "Speedbus read communication table " using

Speedbus TCP protocol.

2. Speedbus TCP protocol support disperse . blended data transfer,

communication efficient very well.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

1. Define Speedbus read communication table " read 2# PLC data "as follows:
Sequence
number Read data from
Write date to slave
slave

1 X0 M10
2 X3 M11
3 V11 V80
4 V12 V81
5 AI0 V20
6 AI1 V21

2. Define Speedbus write communication table " write 2# PLC data "as follows:

Sequence
number Read data from Write date to slave
slave
 1 X0 M100
2 X1 M101
3 V0 V100
4 V50 V102
5 Y4 M0
6 Y5 Y0
7 V60 V200
8 V61 V201

3. TCPHWR, TCPHWW instructions will execute after getting charged from the

busbars, according to the definition of "Speedbus read (writte) communication

table", and will automaticaly exchange the data with the 2# PLC of IP address

192.168.1.111.

TCPHWW(Speedbus TCP write)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
TCPHWW En, IP, Table, Slave, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

IP Slave equipment IP address √

Speedbus write √
Table
communication table

Slave Slave equipment address √

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Communication complete
Out √
Output

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. TCPHWW instruction automatically exchanged the data with the slave device

according to the definition of "Speedbus write communication table " using

Speedbus TCP protocol.

2. Speedbus TCP protocol support disperse . blended data transfer,

communication efficient very well.

[Instruction example]

Refer to TCPHWR instruction example.

Interrupt instruction

Interrupt instruction list as follows

Support
Instruction language
8 bit model 32 bit model Instruction function
name
LD FBD IL

ATCH Interrupt binding √ √ √

DTCH Interrupt release √ √ √

ENI Enable interrupt √ √ √

DISI Disable interrupt √ √ √

1. PLC support up to 52 system interrupt source, include pulse output. edge catch .

high speed counter and timer interrupt. refer to "system interrupt table ".

2. Interrupt program only use ATCH instruction binding corresponding interrupt,

moreover system generate the interrupt executed once ,others any time not

execute. refer to "interrupt program".

3. Interrupt program must try to do short and small ,only necessary instruction in

interrupt program execute.

ATCH(Interrupt binding)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example
 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
ATCH En, Int, IntP
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Int Interrupt number √

IntP Interrupt program name √

Eno Enable output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

ATCH instruction use for binding IntP interrupt program and Int interrupt number ,

when system generate Int interrupt, automatic execute binding IntP interrupt

program, instruction general executed by edge.

[Instruction example]

1. At "PLC hardware configure " window configure "DI digital Input Parameter"

open X1 rising edge catch function .

2. Write interrupt program "X1 rising edge catch", only one instruction,V0 increase

1,as follows.
 3. Write main program "ATCH" as follows:

[Program description]

1. M0=ON, use for Interrupt program binding "X1 rising edge catch " and Interrupt

number I18(X1 rising edge interrupt), thus when X1 from OFF go to ON ,system

generate I18 interrupt moreover call interrupt program "X1 rising edge catch".

2. M1=ON, release interrupt number I18 bind, by now even if system generate

I18 interrupt also not execute interrupt program.

3. M2=ON, enable system interrupt, thus when X1 from OFF go to ON, system

generate I18 interrupt.

4. M3=ON, disable system interrupt, thus system not generate any interrupt.

DTCH(Interrupt release)
 In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
DTCH En, Int
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Int Interrupt number √

Eno Enable output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

DTCH instruction release Int Interrupt number bind interrupt program, instruction

general executed by edge.

[Instruction example]

Refer to ATCH instruction example.

ENI(Enable interrupt)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
ENI En
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

ENI instruction open system interrupt function , system default open interrupt,

instruction general executed by edge.

[Instruction example]

Refer to ATCH instruction example.

DISI(Disable interrupt)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
DISI En
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

DISI instruction shielding system interrupt function , after instruction executed no

more generate system interrupt, instruction general executed by edge.

[Instruction example]

Refer to ATCH instruction example.

Program control instruction

 Program control instruction list as follows

Support
Instruction language
8 bit model 32 bit model Instruction function
name
LD FBD IL

MC Master control √ √ √

MCR Master control clear √ √ √

FOR Loop command √ √ √

NEXT Loop end √ √ √

WAIT Delay wait √ √ √

CALL Call subroutine √ √ √

EXIT Condition exit √ √ √

REWD Scanning time reset √ √ √

JMPC Condition jump √ √ √

LBL Jump label √ √ √

MC(Master control)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example
 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
MC En, N
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

N Label √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. MC is master control start instruction, N is Master control number, when En=ON,

the instructions inner master control N ( between MC N and MCR N instruction )

as usual executed .

2. When En=OFF ,the instructions inner master control N ( between MC and MCR

instruction) skiped, moreover reset OUT instruction output. timer coil T and

current value TV. counter coil Cand current value CV at the same time .

3. MC-MCR instruction support nested structure , maximum may be up to 8 level.

[Instruction example]
 [Program description]

1. Network 1 define master control 1 start , network 3 define master control 1 finish

2. When M0=ON, master control 1 program (Network 2) normal execution, when

M1=ON,Y0=ON, timer T0 start timing , counter C0 increase 1,CV0=1,C0=ON.

Master control 1 external Network 4 timer T1 start timing .

3. When M0=OFF, then master control 1 program (Network 2) instruction skip,

moreover reset Y0=OFF. T0=OFF. TV0=0. C0=OFF. CV0=0.Master control 1

external Network 4 timer T1 keep on timing.

MCR(Master control clear)

In

struction format and parameter specification

 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
MCR N
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

N Label √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

MCR is master control finish instruction ,N is master control number, only pair use

with MC instruction .

FOR(Loop command)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
FOR En, Index, Init, Final
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Index Loop index √

S
Init √
tart value

Final Stop value √

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Eno Enable output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. FOR instruction and NEXT instruction must be used in pairs , among FOR sign

the start of the circulate, NEXT sign the finish of the circulate .The statement

between FOR and NEXT named loop body .

2. FOR/NEXT instruction repeatedly execute the statement in the loop

body until reach cycle count, among, count value of the cycle count store

to parameter index, moreover Init assigned Index start value,Final

assigned Index stop value .

3. A integral loop body include in a loop body , also name loop

nesting .FOR/NEXT support nesting, nested depth maximum are 8 level.

4. In loop body ,user can modify stop value Final, thus modify the stop condition of

the loop .

5. If many cycle count , then the program execute time possible exceed system

watchdog timer value ,thus possible triggering system watchdog action cause

safeguard stop,by now must add REWD instruction in the loop body to reset

watchdog.

[Instruction example]
 [Program description]

1. M0=ON, each scan cycleV10 increase 1,Network 2 start one loop, loop index

V0, cycle count 30(0~29),Network 3 loop body instruction,V2 each increase 1(after

executed a loop then add 30), thus V2 must be V10 30 times.

2. REWD instruction reset watchdog ,NEXT is loop end define.

NEXT(Loop end)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
NEXT
format

[Instruction function and effect declare]

 Define the end of the loop ,only be used in pairs with FOR instruction .

WAIT(Delay wait)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
WAIT En, Tms
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Unit
Tms Delay time √
0.1ms

Eno Enable output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. WAIT instruction make PLC program execute pause, pause time setup by

parameter Tms .

2. WAIT instruction extend the scan cycle, may be trigger the watchdog actuation ,

must try to do not use.

CALL(Call subroutine)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example
 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction CALL En, SubP(0-8 input parameter names)(0-3 output

format parameter names)

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Sub
SubP √
routine name

Input parameter(Can be no √
Par1~8
parameters)

Eno Enable output √

Output

Out1~3 parameter ( √

Can be no parameters)

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. CALL instruction use for call subroutine. Call subroutine can with parameter or

without parameter, use programming software new subroutine window or

subroutine attribute window, may be modify and edit the parameter of the

subroutine ;When SubP parameter item input the subroutine name, programming
 software use for according to the defined parameter of the subroutine the program

give the input . output parameter item and parameter name to call the subroutine ,

instruction input output parameter item enable input data type and the data type of

the subroutine defined parameter must be no difference

2. Use CALL call subroutine, if the subroutine called not defined parameter, then

without parameter call,CALL instruction Input parameter item and output

parameter item omit .to with parameter call subroutine ,parameter therefore

transfer and assign in sequence one to one mode.

3. Use CALL instruction reach call subroutine program named main program ,

subroutine may be called repeat, support nest call subroutine ,maximum nesting 8

level.

4. Subroutine parameter declare:

A. One subroutine maximum may be define 8 input(IN) or input output

(IN_OUT) parameter and 3 output(OUT) parameter;

B. Each parameter all have the parameter type(IN-input parameter,OUT-

output parameter,IN_OUT—input output parameter) and data type, when use

CALL instruction call the subroutine , instruction input output parameter item allow

input data type no difference of the data type of the subroutine defined parameter .

5. subroutineParameter的Parameter typeas follows table 所示:

Parameter
Mean
type

IN Input parameter, by CALL instruction use for parameter data incoming subroutine

Input output parameter ,first CALL instruction use for parameter data incoming subroutine
IN_OUT
,subroutine execut use for again incoming result to CALL instruction parameter

Output parameter ,subroutine after executed again incoming result to CALL instruction
OUT
parameter
 6. subroutine data type as follows:
Data
Mean
type

BOOL Also known as bool type ,ON or OFF

WORD 16 bit word, may be data range is -32768~32767

Double word,32 bit ,may be data range is -2147483648~2147483647,occupy 2 continuous

DWORD
component

INT Integer,16 bit ,may be data range is -32768~32767

Double integer,32 bit ,may be data range is -2147483648~2147483647,occupy 2

DINT
continuous component

Single precision floating point ,32 bit ,occupy 2 continuous component

REAL

7. Call subroutine PLC program executing sequence schematic diagram follows:

[Instruction example]

1. Program one subroutine "measuring range transfer ", the subroutine achieve SC

instruction same function ,as follows.

 2. Program main program "CALL"as follows:

[Program description]

1. Subroutine with 4 input parameter and 1output parameter, calculate Out = (In -

InDw) * (OutUp- OutDw) / (InUp- InDw) + OutDw.

 2. Main program when M0=ON,2 CALL instruction call the same subroutine

"measuring range transfer", because different the parameter transfered , achieve

different range transfer function ,as follows:

Parameter
Parameter value Call subroutine result

InUp 1500 When V0=0, then V100 =0

When V0=100, then V100 =333
InDw 0 When V0=1200, then V100
OutUp 5000 =4000
When V0=1250, then V100
OutDw 0 =4166
InUp 32000 When V2=0, then V102 =4000

When V2=1600, then V102

InDw 0
=4800
When V2=16000, then V102
OutUp 20000 =12000
When V2=28000, then V102
OutDw 4000 =18000

EXIT(Condition exit)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
EXIT En
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

EXIT is condition exit instruction, only use which need early exit from subroutine or

interruption , normal exit subroutine or interruption without add the instruction.

REWD(Scanning time reset)

In
struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
REWD En
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. REWD instruction use for reset watchdog.

2. When program need loop execution at some condition , thus possible triggering

system watchdog actuation cause protect stop ,by now must add REWD

instruction within the loop body to reset watchdog.

3. REWD instruction make watchdog out of action, must try to do not use.

JMPC(Condition jump)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
JMPC En, N
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

N Jump label √
[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. JMPC is with condition jump instruction, when En=ON, program use for jump to

label N appoint position next instruction continue execution, if En=OFF then do not

jump ,use original instruction sequence execution.

2. N Jump label must use LBL instruction define, if label not exist, then the

instruction not execute.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

1. Network 1 INC instruction from busbar get electricity , each scan cycle use for

V0 increase 1.

2. When M0=OFF,JMPC instruction not execute,Network 3 INC instructionfrom

busbar get electricity ,each scan cycle use for V2 increase 1.

3. When M0=ON, JMPC instruction execution , jump to label1 back continue

execution,by now V2 not increase 1.

 LBL(Jump label)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
LBL N
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

N Jump label √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

LBL instruction use for define jump label, to JMPC instruction use .

Special Function instruction

Special function instruction list as follows

Support
Instruction language
8 bit model 32 bit model Instruction function
name
LD FBD IL

GPWM General pulse width modulation √ √ √

FTC Fuzzy temperature control √ √ √

PID PID control √ √ √

HAL D.HAL Upper limit alarm √ √ √

LAL D.LAL Lower limit alarm √ √ √

 Support
Instruction language
8 bit model 32 bit model Instruction function
name
LD FBD IL

LIM D.LIM Range limitation √ √ √

SC D.SC Linear conversion √ √ √

VC Valve control √ √ √

TTC Temperature curve control √ √ √

APID Self-tuning PID √ √ √

GPWM(General pulse width modulation)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
GPWM En, PulR, PulT, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Enable
En √

PulR Pulse duty factor √ Unit 0.1%, range 0~1000

PulT Pulse output period √ Unit ms

Pulse width modulation

Out √
output
 [Instruction function and effect declare]

1. GPWM instruction use for common transistor output point Yn output pulse which

variable pulse period . duty facto.

2. Maximum pulse period is 32767, when PulT≤0 not output pulse.

3. When PulT＞0, if PulR＞0 moreover PulR＜1000 ,Out output pulse of duty

factor is PulR. period is PulT, if PulR=0 then Out output low level, if PulR≥1000

then Out output high level singal.

4. PulR. PulT value cn be modified real time.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

1. When M0=ON, from Y20 output the pulse which duty factor is 30%. period is

30ms.

2. When M0=OFF, pulse output stop.

FTC(Fuzzy temperature control)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
FTC En, PV, SV, Out, MV
format
Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

PV Measure value √ Unit 0.1℃

SV Set value √ Unit 0.1℃

Co
Act √ 0-reaction,1-direct action, others invalid.
ntrol mode

Out
Pulse width √
modulation output

MV Control output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. FTC instruction use for fuzzy temperature control special purpose instruction,

the instruction need not set any parameter completely automatic regulate output

,simpleness use .

2. Act is control mode,Act=0 is reaction(PV increase ,MV output trend decrease,

normal use for heat control),Act=1 is direct action(PV increase,MV output trend

increase,normal use for cool control).

3. Instruction have 2 output mode, Out pulse width modulation output(frequency

1Hz),MV is control output( range 0~1000).

4. En is instruction enable item , when En=ON instruction execute ;When

En=OFF instruction stop execute ,Out=OFF,MV=0.

5. Many external factor will influence temperature control effective , such as:

sensor accuracy . sensor install position . heat function big or small etc., if FTC
 temperature control effective unsatisfactory ,may be use PID or program

experience control arithmetic oneself .

[Note]: When the FTC instruction first run, it will automatically control the output

Out=On, MV=1000, this process is used to calculate the fuzzy factor, and should

be used when PV is in room temperature,and the calculation process will take less

than 1.5 minutes. The calculated fuzzy coefficients will be stored in the instruction,

and it wil not be lost when the plc is shut down. If the program is re-

downloaded,then the FTC instruction which is again in the first run will

automatically calculate the fuzzy factor.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON,FTC instruction execute, according to deviation of AI0 and V1000

use fuzzy control arithmetic to control output .When M0=OFF, then

Y3=OFF,V100=0.

PID(PID control)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example
 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction PID En, Act, PV, SV, P, I, D, T, Span, PVH, PVL, MVH,
format MVL, MV

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Co
Act √ 0-reaction,1-direct action, others invalid.
ntrol mode

PV Measure value √

SV Set value √

P Proportionnality coefficient √ Unit %

I Integral time √ Unit 10ms

Deri
D √ Unit 10ms
vative time

T Sampling period √ Unit 10ms

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

Span Dead band √

PV m
PVH √
easuring upper limit

PVL PV measuring lower limit √

MVH MV measuring upper limit √

MVL MV measuring lower limit √

Eno Enable output √

MV Control output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. Act is control mode,Act=0 is reaction(PV increase ,MV output trend decrease,

normal use for heat control),Act=1 is direct action(PV increase,MV output trend

increase,normal use for cool control).

2. En is instruction enable item, when En=ON instruction execute; When En=OFF

instruction stop execute ,MV=0.

3. Many external factor will influence temperature control effective ,need time and

again adjust P. I. D these 3 parameters to meet the control object, also can

program experience control arithmetic oneself .

4. P. I. D parameters direct influence reality control effective stand and fail , below

are the three parameters function in PID control :

Proportionnality coefficient (P) regulating effect : is a percentage data. is

response system deviation in proportion ,system in case of appear deviation,

 proportional control immediately generate regulating effect to reduce

deviation. Proportional action big ,may be accelerate regulate, reduce

deviation, but oversize proportion , make system stability descend , even

cause system unstable.

Integral time (I) regulating effect : make system eliminate steady state error,

improve indifference .Because have error , integral control as for as proceed,

until have not error, integral control stop , integral control output a constant

.Integral functional strong and weak depend on integral time I,I big ,integral

functional stronger, regulate response slower .Otherwise I small then integral

functional weaker, regulate response faster, add integral control make system

stability descend, dynamic response slower .Integral functional common use

with others two regulating mode combine, make up PI regulator or PID

regulator .When Integral time set to 0, no integral.

Derivative time (D) regulating effect : differential functional reflect system

deviation signal rate of change , have foreseeability , can foresee deviation

change trend , so can generate ahead of control function, before deviation not

yet production , already be differential regulating effect eliminate. thus, may be

improve system dynamic response . At derivative time suitable selected , may

be reduce overshoot, reduce regulating time. Differential functional amplified

action the noise interference , that is the overflow differential functional

,harmful to system anti-interference .Moreover ,differential corresponsive rate

of change, when Input unchanged, differential functional output is zero.

differential functional can not alone used , must use with others two regulating

mode combine, make up PI regulator or PID regulator .When derivative time

set to 0, no iderivative.
 5. Incremental PID arithmetic :

△u(n) = Kp * △e(n) + Ki * e(n) + Kd (△e(n) - △e(n-1) ) )

= Kp * △e(n) + Ki * e(n) + Kd * (e(n) – 2 * e(n-1) + e(n-2))

u(n) = u(n-1) + △u(n) reaction

u(n) = u(n-1) - △u(n) direct action

Among:u(n):MV Output

u(n-1):last output

△u(n): output incremental

Kp=P / 100:proportionnality coefficient

Ki=Kp * T / I: integral coefficient

Kd=D / T: derivative coefficient

e(n)=(SV - PV): deviation

e(n-1):last deviation

e(n-2):last last deviation

[Instruction example]
 [Program description]

1. When M0=ON,PID instruction execute, according to AI0 and V1000 deviation

get through PID arithmetic Control output.When M0=OFF, instruction not

execute,AQ0=0.

2. If need use for PID instruction analog output turn into digital duty factor output,

use GPWM instruction ,PulT=5000 express pulse period 5 second, Note PID

instruction MV output range setup to 0~1000.

HAL. D.HAL(Upper limit alarm)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
HAL En, In, Up, Span, Out

Instruction
D.HAL En, In, Up, Span, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In Input √

Up Upper limit alarm value √

Span Dead band √

Out Status output √

 [Instruction function and effect declare]

HAL instruction is upper limit alarm instruction. If In>(Up+Span), then Out=ON; If

In<(Up-Span), then Out=OFF, when In and Up deviation value less than equal to

dead band value span,Out remain unchanged.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON start upper limit alarm function .If AI0 is temperature measure

value ,V1000=3000(300°),V1001=20(2°) , when AI0>3020(302°) Y3=ON; When

AI0<2980(298°) Y3=OFF.

LAL. D.LAL(Lower limit alarm)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
LAL En, In, Down, Span, Out

Instruction
D.LAL En, In, Down, Span, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √
 Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

In Input √

Down Lower limit alarm value √

Span Dead band √

Out Status output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

LAL instruction is lower limit alarm instruction. If In<(Down-Span), then Out=ON; If

In>(Down+Span), then Out=OFF, when In and Down deviation value less than

equal to dead band value span,Out remain unchanged.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON start lower limit alarm function .If AI0 is temperature measure value

,V1000=300(30°),V1001=20(2°) , when AI0<280(28°) Y3=ON; When AI0>320(32°)

Y3=OFF.

LIM. D.LIM(Range limitation)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example
 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
LIM En, In, Up, Down, Out

Instruction
D.LIM En, In, Up, Down, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In Input √

U
Up √
pper limit

Down Lower limit √

Eno Enable output √

Out Output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. LIM is range limitation instruction, if In>Up then Out=Up, if Down≤In≤Up then

Out=In, if In<Down then Out=Down.

2. if Up≤Down, then the instruction not execute.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]
 When M0=ON start range limitation. If V1000=800,V1001=20, when V0<20

AQ0=20;When V0>800 AQ0=800, when 20≤V0≤800 AQ0=V0.

SC. D.SC(Linear conversion)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

16. 32 bit
SC En, In, InUp, InDown, OutUp, OutDown, Out

Instruction
D.SC En, In, InUp, InDown, OutUp, OutDown, Out
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

In Input √

InUp Input upper limit √

InDown Input lower limit √

OutUp Output upper limit √

OutDown Output lower limit √

Eno Enable output √

Out Transfer output √

 [Instruction function and effect declare]

1. SC instruction according to input. output bound In input proceed linear

conversion transfer output to out.

2. Linear conversion formula : out = (In - InDown) * (OutUp- OutDown) / (InUp-

InDown) + OutDown.

3. if InUp=InDown, then the instruction not execute.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

When M0=ON, SC V0 transfer output to V10,as follows table .

c

omponent Initial value Transfer result

V1000 32000 When V0=0, then V10 =1000

When V0=100, then V10 =1012
V1001 0 When V0=12000, then V10
V1002 5000 =2500
When V0=28000, then V10
V1003 1000 =4500

VC(Valve control)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example
 Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction VC En, OLim, CLim, JOG, PV, SV, Span, Ts, Open,
format Close

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

OLim Valve open limit √

CLim Valve close limit √

JOG Valve jog √

PV Measure value √

SV Set value √

Span Dead band √

Motor
Ts √ Unit 秒
running time

Open Valve open output √

Valve close
Close √
output
[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. VC is specific to valve control special purpose instruction, like one valve

controler.

2. En is instruction enable item , when En=ON instruction execute, when En=OFF

instruction stop working,Open=OFF,Close=OFF.

3. VC instruction according to valve current opening PV and valve set opening SV

compare, if both difference value greater than dead band span, then action to

Valve control output (open or close), each the motor running time longest is

Ts(second).

4. Open valve open control:when (SV - PV)> Span ,Open=ON valve open output;

When (SV - PV)≤ Span ,Open=OFF valve open stop .In control valve process, if

valve open limit Olim=ON ,Open=OFF.

5. Close valve close control:when (PV - SV)> Span ,Close=ON valve close output;

When (PV - SV)≤ Span ,Close=OFF valve close stop .In control valve process, if

valve close limit Clim=ON,Close=OFF.

6. Valve jog control:when JOG from OFF go to ON, use for according to SV. PV.

Span three current value make out open or close the valve( control according to

and on-off control the same as), each jogthe motor running time longest is

Ts(second).

7. If Ts＞0,valve guard time valid ,In Ts valve not reach the preset position (Set

value), on-off action stop , in case valve appear mechanical error and yet damage

the motor which running time too long.

8. If Ts=0, express time-out output, note the valve lose protect function .

9. If Span＜0 or Ts＜0, then instruction not execute.

 10. If valve without limit protection output,Olim. Clim may be use SM1 input,

express not use limit protect function .

11. VC instruction can cooperate PID etc. instruction realize more complex control

function .

[Instruction example]

TTC(Temperature curve control)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
TTC En, Begin, End, Ts, Act, Out, Val, Ct
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Begin Start point value √

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

End End point value √

Ts Control time √ Ts＞0 unit is second,Ts＜0 unit is minute

Act Control mode √

Eno Enable output √

Out Status output √

Val Output value √

Ct Current time √ unit is second,occupy 2 continuous component

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. TTC instruction use for control data value in given time from start point value

(Begin) to end point value (End) changing process, that is ratio control.

2. Ts is control time,Ts＞0 unit is second,Ts＜0 unit is minute,Ts=0 then invalid

instruction not execute, without unit is second or minute instruction all each

second arithmetic utput once.

3. When Act=0 (restart mode), at TTC instruction start ,reset Out=OFF, then from

Begin start timing control output Val.

4. When Act=1 (memory mode), at TTC instruction start , reset Out=OFF

moreover read current value Val, according the condition to execute of Val in

Begin~End interzone.

1). Begin<End (ascent stage), if Val≤Begin then from start point value

(Begin) start timing control output Val; if Val≥End then timing out ,Val invariant
 moreover Out=ON; if Val at Begin~End interzone then from Val start timing

control output Val.

2). Begin>End (decline stage), if Val≥Begin then from Begin start timing

control output Val; if Val≤End then timing out ,Val invariant moreover Out=ON; if

Val at Begin~Endinterzone then from Val start timing control output Val.

3). Begin=End ( maintain stage), if Val=Begin then from start point value

(Begin) start timing control output Val; if Val≠Begin then timing out ,Val invariant

moreover Out=ON.

5. Instruction in processing, parameters Begin. End. Ts can not be modified (

modified not take effect at real time, need re-execute the instruction).

6. Use TTC instruction may be generate mulit-segment curve, may be cooperate

PID etc. others instruction realize more complex control function .

7. At Act=1(memory mode),Val output item should use preserv component .

[Instruction example]
[Program description]

If "3 segment curve initial data" as follows table .

c

omponent Initial value Output curve

V1000 300

V1001 1200

V1002 -2

V1003 1200

V1004 1200

V1005 30

V1006 1200

V1007 300

V1008 60
 1. When M10=ON, start first segment curve , from 300 to 1200 take 2 minute,

complete M27=ON.

2. When M27=ON, start second segment curve ,from 1200to 1200 take30 second ,

complete M28=ON.

3. When M28=ON, start third segment curve ,from 1200 to 300 take 60 second,

complete M29=ON.

4. When M29=ON,reset M10=OFF.

APID(Self-tuning PID control)

In

struction format and parameter specification

Program
Language LD FBD IL
example

Instruction
APID En, Act, Start, PV, SV, P, I, D, MV
format

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

En Enable √

Act Control mode √ 0-reaction,1-direct action, others invalid.

Start Start Self-tuning √

Parameter Parameter define Input Output Declare

PV Measure value √

SV Set value √

P Proportionnality coefficient √ Unit %

I Integral time √ Unit 10ms

Deri
D √ Unit 10ms
vative time

Eno Enable output √

MV Control output √

[Instruction function and effect declare]

1. Act is control mode,Act=0 is reaction(PV increase ,MV output trend decrease,

normal use for heat control),Act=1 is direct action(PV increase,MV output trend

increase,normal use for cool control).

2. En is instruction enable item, when En=ON instruction execute; When En=OFF

instruction stop execute ,MV=0.

3. When Start=ON, it starts the auto-tuning, after the finishing of the self-tuning the

instruction will automatically write the calculated P. I. D parameter value to the

concerning register corresponding to the terminal. If the parameters obtained by

the auto-tuning is not satisfactory, you can reactivate "Start" to carry out the auto-

tuning again, or manually input the parameter. There is much external factors

affecting the control effect, it's necessary to repeatedly adjust the P. I. D

parameters to meet the requirements of the control object,besides, the

experienced technican can also adjust the parameters themselves.

4. P. I. D parameters direct influence reality control effective stand and fail , below

are the three parameters function in PID control :

Proportionnality coefficient (P) regulating effect : is a percentage data. is

response system deviation in proportion ,system in case of appear deviation,

proportional control immediately generate regulating effect to reduce

deviation. Proportional action big ,may be accelerate regulate, reduce

deviation, but oversize proportion , make system stability descend , even

cause system unstable.

Integral time (I) regulating effect : make system eliminate steady state error,

improve indifference .Because have error , integral control as for as proceed,

until have not error, integral control stop , integral control output a constant

.Integral functional strong and weak depend on integral time I,I big ,integral

functional stronger, regulate response slower .Otherwise I small then integral

functional weaker, regulate response faster, add integral control make system

stability descend, dynamic response slower .Integral functional common use

with others two regulating mode combine, make up PI regulator or PID

regulator .When Integral time set to 0, no integral.

Derivative time (D) regulating effect : differential functional reflect system

deviation signal rate of change , have foreseeability , can foresee deviation

change trend , so can generate ahead of control function, before deviation not

yet production , already be differential regulating effect eliminate. thus, may be

improve system dynamic response . At derivative time suitable selected , may

be reduce overshoot, reduce regulating time. Differential functional amplified

 action the noise interference , that is the overflow differential functional

,harmful to system anti-interference .Moreover ,differential corresponsive rate

of change, when Input unchanged, differential functional output is zero.

differential functional can not alone used , must use with others two regulating

mode combine, make up PI regulator or PID regulator .When derivative time

set to 0, no iderivative.

[Note]: Auto-tuning should be performed when PV is in the room temperature and

the entire auto-tuning process takes less than 1.5 minutes. The PID coefficient

obtained from the auto-tuning will be automatically written to the corresponding

P、I、D terminals, so the P、I、D terminals of the instruction should use latched

registers.

[Instruction example]

[Program description]

1. When M0=ON,APID instruction execute, according to AI0 and V1000 deviation

get through APID arithmetic Control output.When M0=OFF, instruction not

execute,AQ0=0.
2. If need use for APID instruction analog output turn into digital duty factor output,

use GPWM instruction ,PulT=1000 express pulse period 1 second.

Programming operation manual
This section introduce operation of PLC programming software .

Programming environment

Overview

Programming software main interface include: menu. tools bar . project

management. working area and status bar etc..

Menu

Menu include all function of programming software , compose by main

menu and multistage submenu.

1. "File" submenu : use for mange the related operations of the program

project file.
2. "Edit" submenu : use for edit the program related operations.

3. "Search" submenu : use for open all kinds of resource window,

change language. display mode etc..

4. "PLC" submenu : use for all kinds of control PLC.

5. "Debug" submenu : supply a group related tools to convenience

debug the program.

 6. "Tools" submenu : supply a group convenience tools, as: manage the

remote module.

7. "Help" submenu : supply online Help function.

Tools bar

Tools bar include PLC programming software common function , so that

user can program quickly. When move mouse onto tools bar button the

button name will be displayed.

 1. Standard tools bar :

2. LD language tools bar :

3. FBD language tools bar :

4. Simulator tools bar :

5. "Interpolation simulator" window tools bar :

6. "Remote module" window tools bar :

7. "Batch component comment" window tools bar :

8. Print previewtools bar :

Right click menu

For improve program efficiency, programming software use vast right

click menu. Via mouse right button click to popup right click menu.

1. At LD language programming environment , pitch up switch right click

menu:
 2. At LD language programming environment , pitch up instruction or

instruction item right click menu:

 3. At FBD language programming environment , pitch up instruction

right click menu:

 4. At FBD language programming environment , pitch up instruction

item right click menu:

5. At IL language programming environment right click menu:

6. At simulation environment right click menu:

7. At online monitoring environment right click menu:

8. At "Component status table" window right click menu:

 9. "PLC hardware configuration" window. "Project manager" window.

"Online PLC" window etc. also support right click menu.

Shortcut key

PLC programming software supply abundant shortcut key, during user

write the program, may be use shortcut key improve programming speed

and efficiency, make the programming operation easy and efficient

,shortcut key listing as follows:

Category Shortcut key Function and purpose

menu Alt + F Open "File" menu

operation

Alt + E Open "Edit" menu

 Alt + V Open "Search" menu

Alt + P Open "PLC" menu

Alt + D Open "Debug" menu

Alt + T Open "Tools" menu

Alt + W Open " window" menu

Alt + H Open "Help" menu

Ctrl + N New program project

Ctrl + O Open program project

Program
project Ctrl + S Save program project
operation

Ctrl + P Print

Alt + F4 Exit programming software

Edit Ctrl + Z Recover

Ctrl + R Redo

Ctrl + X Cut
 Ctrl + C Copy

Ctrl + V Paste

Ctrl + G Go to …

Ctrl + F Search

F3 Search next

Ctrl + A Select all

F5 Start "Online monitor"

Debug
F6 Stop "Online monitor "

Program edit Ctrl + 1 LD program :normal open

Ctrl + 2 LD program :normal close

Ctrl + 3 LD program :rising edge switch

Ctrl + 4 LD program :failling edge switch

Ctrl + 5 LD program :equal to switch(16 bit

compare)
 LD program :not equal to
Ctrl + 6
switch(16 bit compare)

LD program :greater than

Ctrl + 7
switch(16 bit compare)

LD program :greater than or equal

Ctrl + 8
to switch(16 bit compare)

LD program :less than switch(16

Ctrl + 9
bit compare)

LD program :less than or equal to

Ctrl + 0
switch(16 bit compare)

LD program :equal to switch(32 bit

Ctrl + Alt + 5
compare)

LD program :not equal to

Ctrl + Alt + 6
switch(32 bit compare)

LD program :greater than

Ctrl + Alt + 7
switch(32 bit compare)

LD program :greater than or equal

Ctrl + Alt + 8
to switch(32 bit compare)

Ctrl + Alt + 9 LD program :less than switch(32

bit compare)
 LD program :less than or equal to
Ctrl + Alt + 0
switch(32 bit compare)

LD program :equal to
Ctrl + Shift + 5 switch(floating point number
compare)

LD program :not equal to

Ctrl + Shift + 6 switch(floating point number
compare)

LD program :greater than

Ctrl + Shift + 7 switch(floating point number
compare)

LD program :greater than or equal

Ctrl + Shift + 8 to switch(floating point number
compare)

LD program :less than

Ctrl + Shift + 9 switch(floating point number
compare)

LD program :less than or equal to

Ctrl + Shift + 0 switch(floating point number
compare)

LD program :equal to switch(low

Alt + 5
byte compare)
Alt + 6 LD program :not equal to
switch(low byte compare)

LD program :greater than

Alt + 7
switch(low byte compare)

LD program :greater than or equal

Alt + 8
to switch(low byte compare)

LD program :less than switch(low

Alt + 9
byte compare)

LD program :less than or equal to

Alt + 0
switch(low byte compare)

LD program :equal to switch(high

Alt + Shift + 5
byte compare)

LD program :not equal to

Alt + Shift + 6
switch(high byte compare)

LD program :greater than

Alt + Shift + 7
switch(high byte compare)

LD program :greater than or equal

Alt + Shift + 8
to switch(high byte compare)

LD program :less than switch(high

Alt + Shift + 9
byte compare)
Alt + Shift + 0 LD program :less than or equal to
switch(high byte compare)

LD. IL program :application

Ctrl + U
instruction move up

LD. IL program :application

Ctrl + D
instruction move down

Ctrl + Up LD program :network move up

Ctrl + Down LD program :network move down

F7 LD program :STL step start

LD program :SFROM step

F8
combine

F9 LD program :series switch

F10 LD program :parallel switch

F11 LD program :output coil

LD program :STO step transfer

F12
instruction

Ctrl+B LD program :output branch

 Ctrl+H LD program :delete output branch

Ctrl+L LD program :add network

Ctrl+I LD program :insert network

Online Help F1 Open online help

ESC Cancel operation

Common use
DEL Delete pitch up object

Status bar

Status bar use for indicate programming software current status and

display relate operation prompt message, via menu [Search/status bar

]open or close it.

Working area

User working area is use for write control program . configure PLC

hardware information.At the area, user may be edit current program or PLC

hardware configure information.

 Project manager

Via menu [Search/project manager] open "Project manager" page, it

use tree form structure display total project all content: project name. main

program block. sub program . interrupt program . table. PLC hardware

configure. all kinds of instruction etc.. Project manager support right click

menu, convenience user manage operate the project .

 PLC resource

Via menu [Search/PLC resource] open "PLC resource" page,"PLC

resource" page total 5 sub pages, list current program project CPU all

resources of MPU, and system status bit. system register. interrupt and

error code.
 Component comment table

Via menu [Search/component comment table]open "component

comment table" page, it list current program project all component

comment.
 Instruction declare window

Via menu [Search/instruction declare window] open "instruction declare

window" page, it list current pitched up instruction brief declare,

convenience user understand the instruction.

 Instruction attribute window

Double click the application instruction in the program, can open the

instruction attribute window, different content will be display according to

different instruction.
When select "Instruction forbidden" , the instruction can not be executed

and display turn to grey .

When select "Low byte mode" ,the instruction is 8 bit mode; when select

"32 bits" ,the instruction is 32 bit mode.

At the window also my be modify the timer time base. counter number.

input and output parameter of the instruction.

Item define window

At " instruction attribute window" double click input or output item can

open "Item" window,different content will be display according to the input

or output item of different instruction, at "Item" window can define the

parameter via configuration mode, need not consult material can

convenience input complicated combination parameter, as: communication

instruction COMM Protocol item.

Program structure
User program have main program . sub program . interrupt program

three type program block constitute.

Main program block. sub program . interrupt program three sum total can

not exceed 31 blocks.

All program block all can alone setting up the password, realize local

encryption function.

Main program
 Main program is the main part and frame of user program ,PLC permit

many main program block ,between blocks of the main program category

vis-a-vis, system is running, all main program block will be executed

cycling, the executed sequence is at "project manager" sequence of the

catalogue tree , executed from up to below.

User program at least include a main program block.

May via menu [Debug/ program executed block] regulate the executed

sequence .

Sub program

sub program is function independent . program block which may be

called by others program block,sub program may be with parameter or

without parameter, a sub program maximum define 8 input (IN) or input

output (IN_OUT) parameter and 3 output (OUT)parameter.

User program may be without sub program ,also include one or many sub

programs .

Sub program will be executed after called by CALL instruction.

Sub program may call other sub program ,but can not call itself, also can

not circulate called.

Sub program enable nest called, include program block call the sub

program, the nest called depth can not exceed 8 stages.

Sub program called schematic diagram as follows:

Interrupt program

Interrupt program is a program which deal with system interrupt event .

System assign a interrupt number for each interrupt event, refer to "System

interrupt table".

Interrupt program executed must meet 2 conditions : one is use ATCH

instruction binding the interrupt program and the interrupt event (interrupt

number), two is system happen the interrupt event. Among, catch X0~X7

rising edge or falling edge interrupt must at "PLC hardware configuration "

window "X digital input parameter" open.

When system happen the interrupt event, program executed broke,

program automatic jump to the interrupt event binded interrupt program

executing, until interrupt program executed complete, system return to

normal program executing.

User program may be without interrupt program , also may be include one

or many interrupt program .

System interrupt controlled by ENI (interrupt enable )and DISI (interrupt

prohibit) instruction ,at interrupt prohibit, system can not happen interrupt

event. Default is enable interrupt.

Note:interrupt program only executed once at corresponding

interrupt event happen.

Program project build

New program project

Via click menu [File/new program project]. click tools bar button or

use shortcut key Ctrl+N,open "new program project" window.

At "PLC series " select among pull listing "PLC series ".

At "CPU type " select among pull listing "CPU also MPU type ".

Latched area after power off may be defined just as user wishes, may set

V. M. S. T. C five type component latched area after power off start

component and the length. System default latched area after power off

listing as follow:
 Component Latched area Component
type after power number
off

V V1000~V2047 1048

M M1536~M2047 512

S S156~S255 100

T T96~T127 32

C C64~C127 64

At "Project name" input new project name, The project name will be display

in main frames of the project manager.

At " User name". "Designer". "Versions". "Company" etc. column input the

project relate to information.

If program project protected by password, then at "password" and "affirm

password " input protect password.

At "Note" may be input the project relate to note information.

Press "Confirm" button build a blank program project.

 New program block

User program have main program . sub program . interrupt program

three type program block constitute. User build many program block

according to control request.

Click menu [File/New....../Main program block] or click tools bar button

"main program block", open "new program block" window.

At "block name" input the name of new program block( the name will be

displayed in the project manager), the select program block type and

programming language, may be write some comment declare at note .

Password" and" confirm password" two text is use for set the program

block ( program block. sub program . interrupt program ) protect password.

If set password for the program block, then request user input correct
password and then search or edit it, each program block may be set

independent password, realize local cypher function.

User may select oneself favorite programming language to write program ,

press "confirm" button to build a blank program block.

New sub program

When build a new sub program or open sub program attribute window,

bottom of the window will listed the sub program parameter table, as

follows.
One sub program maximum define 8 input (IN) or input output (IN_OUT)

parameters and 3 output (OUT) parameters. Each parameter has it

parameter type (IN. OUT. IN_OUT) and data type (BOOL. WORD.

DWORD. INT. DINT. REAL).

When use CALL instruction call sub program ,CALL instruction input output

parameter data type must fit the parameter data type of the sub program

defined.

System automatic distributive the parameter address, when select BOOL

type of the data, address from LM0 distributive, address of others

parameters type from LV0 distributive.

Press "Add" button add a new parameter line, new parameter type default

to IN, data type default to BOOL.

Click parameter name field of the parameter ,at textbox input the parameter

name, parameter name maximum 5 characters, must defined different

name of each parameter , the name will display at CALL instruction.

Click the parameter type field ,at select among pull listing the parameter

type of the parameter (IN. IN_OUT. OUT), system will automatic sort the

parameters according to the parameter type .

 Click the parameter data type field, at select among pull listing data type of

the parameter (BOOL. WORD. DWORD. INT. DINT. REAL).

Press "Insert" button ,insert a new parameter before current line.

Click parameter line will be deleted , press "Delete" button , the parameter

will be deleted.

0. May input the comment of the parameter at the comment field .

Open program block

Double click "Project manager" directory tree program block name or

via right button menu "Open " open the program block .
 Delete program block

Right button click "Project manager" window will be deleted program

block name, at popup right click menu click "Delete" .

 Program block execution sequence adjust

Click menu [Debug/ program block execution sequence], open " program

block execution sequence" window.

Listbox listed current program project all main program block , number is

the current execution sequence, pitch up will be adjusted execution

sequence program block ,click "Move up" or "move down" button, may

adjust the program block execution sequence.

Sub program called by CALL instruction,interrupt program executed trigger

via system interrupt , can not adjust the execution sequence.

Instruction use table

PLC programming software supply many instruction use table, use

these tables may reduce many program workload, save program space,

realize as initialized the data etc. function. Each table can be set password

independent, also may be import or export .

Speedbus read read communication table

"Speedbus read communication table " as the HWRD instruction Table

item parameter ,when communicate between PLC and PLC via Speedbus

protocol ,HWRD instruction according to "Speedbus read communication

table " automatic read data from slave and then write to master PLC. As

follows:
 Speedbus write communication table

"Speedbus write communication table " as HWWR instruction Table

item parameter ,when communicate between PLC and PLC via Speedbus

protocol ,HWWR instruction according to "Speedbus write communication

table " automatic read data from master PLC and then write to slave PLC.

As follows:

Disperse bit component table

 "Disperse bit component table" define a group disperse bit component,

use for BUNB. BUNW. BDIB. WDIB instruction Table item parameter ,

quick realize bit component combination or disperse, convenience upper

computer access. As follows :

Disperse register component table

"Disperse register component table " define a group disperse register

component, use for WUNW. WDIW instruction Table item parameter ,

quick realize register component combination or disperse, convenience

upper computer access. As follows :

 Initial register value table

Use for defined the initial value of register component ,when program

project downloaded to PLC , set initial value in the table will be downloaded

follow the program ,may define integer. long integer. floating point number.

character type data. as follows:

"Start component" assign the V component start address, "Length" assign

the number of components.

"Decimal". "Hexadecimal". "Floating point number". "Character" select the

input mode of the data.

At "Decima". "Hexadecimal" mode ,at "16 bit register value" field input 16

bit integer, at "32 bit register value" field input 32 bit integer. Note:"32 bit

register value" field display the 2 continuation register value of border

upon, as upper drawing the first line V1000 register "32 bit register value"

are V1000V1001 value.

At "Floating point number" mode direct input the floating point number.

Note :floating point number is 32 bit single precision value, occupy 2

continuation registers.

At "Character" mode can direct input character .

New table

Right button click "Project manager" window will be new build table name,

at popup right click menu click "New";click menu[File/New......]or click

Tools bar button select the table type which will be new build , thus will

be build many kinds of tables. Different interface and content according to

different table .
At "Table name" input the name of new table ( the name will be displayed in

project manager), may write some note declare in the note text field .

"Password " and "Confirm password" two text field are use for set the

protect password of the table. If the table password be set , then require

after user input the correct password can be search or edit, each table can

be set password independent, realize locality encryption function.

The "initial register value table " defined the "Start component" and "Length

", then input value of the component. Others kind of tables via "Add".

"Insert". "Delete". "Move up" and "Move down " button to edit the content of

the table.
At "Note" input the note of the table, at " component note" bar Edit

component note.

Press "Confirm" complete build the new table.

Open table

Double click "Project manager" catalog of tree or via right button menu

"Open " may open the table.

Delete table

Right button click "Project manager" window the table name which will

be Delete, at popup right click menu just click "Delete".

PLC hardware configuare
Double click "Project manager" catalog tree "PLC hardware

configuration " hybrid or menu[Search/PLC hardware configuration], open

"PLC hardware configuration " window. user in rise reality hardware model

add extend modules ,may be add. delete or regulate the position of the

extend modules, may be configurate the parameter of configurated MPU

and extend modules ( No more the default value is OK).

 PLC MPU model

PLC MPU type at new program project may be selected and confirm, if

want to modify the MPU type menu [File/ program project attribute]Open "

program project" window, select correct "PLC series " and "CPU type

",press "Confirm" button .

 Extend block edit

1. Open up project manager "PLC module" catalogue tree, find the module

model will be added, double click the module or drag the module to the

hardware configuration table, the module added to the current position in

the PLC hardware configuration table.

2. Callout right button menu, may be add. insert or delete the extend

module ,also may be via move up(Ctrl + U) or move down (Ctrl + D)

regulation the module position.

3. Click the module will be deleted , press "Del" key, the module will be

deleted .

Assign external I/O component

PLC external I/O component (X. Y. AI. AQ) will be automatic assigned

by system , component number is decimal system, when add. delete or

regulation the module position system will afresh regulation .

Note

:AI and AQ component number is continuation number, but X and Y

component number is not continuouation. Because
 X and Y component group in 8 individual

, when module I/O point number is not 8 times will be generated the not

continuation number

X digital input parameter

Can set external digital input "Filter time", filter time get over long then

response get over slow. filter efficiency get over well, filter time get over

short then response get over fast. filter efficiency get over poor.

CPU built-in X0~X7 digital input support edge catch function, if ant to use

edge catch, must tick relevant X channel "Rising edge catch" or "Falling

edge catch" option.

Y digital output parameter

When configurate the Y channel to "Stop output" ,when PLC stop the Y

channel will be keep ON output.

 AI analog input parameter

Linear A input support 6 type signal :[4,20]mA. [0,20]mA. [1,5]V. [0,5]V.

[0,10]V. [-10,10]V.

Thermocouple module support:S. K. T. E. J. B. N. R. Wre3/25. Wre5/26.

[0,20]mV. [0,50]mV. [0,100]mV.

Thermal resistance module support:Pt100. Pt1000. Cu50. Cu100.

May configurate AI channel use quantities, if use quantities then the

channel measuring range resolve via "Upper limit" and "Lower limit" , if

don't use quantities then use 0~32000 code value.

"Sample times" influence the AI channel response time and filter efficiency

,sample times get over big then response time get over long. filter

efficiency get over well ;sample times get over small then response time

get over short. filter efficiency get over poor .

If external sensor generate zero deviation, may via set "zero revise" to

regulation moreover don't replace the sensor. when sensor minus deviation

the zero deviation set to positive value, when sensor positive deviation the

zero deviation set to minus value .

AQ analog output parameter

AQ output support signal type :[4,20]mA. [0,20]mA. [1,5]V. [0,5]V. [0,10]V.

[-10,10]V, each channel may be set independent.

Configurate AQ channel may use quantities, if use quantities then the

channel measuring range resolve via "Upper limit" and "Lower limit" , if

don't use quantities then use 0~32000 code value.

When configurate AQ channel "Stop output", may set a output value, thus

when PLC stop the AQ channel will keep output the set value.

HSC high speed counter parameter

High speed counter support :pulse/direction . positive/negative pulse . A/B

phase pulse input model, support 1. 2. 4 frequency multiplication counting

model

High speed counter channel signify by HSCx ,each channel use 2 high

speed pulse input point.

If there is no high speed counter HHSC in program, don't need configurate

parameter, relevant high speed input point may be use in common X point.
 PLS high speed output parameter

High speed pulse output support : single pulse. pulse/direction .

positive/negative pulse . A/B phase pulse . synchronization pulse output,

total 5 type output mode.

High speed pulse output channel signify by PLSx ,each channel use 2 high

speed pulse output point.

If there is no high pulse output instruction (PLSY. PLSR. PPMR. CIMR etc.)

in program, don't need configurate parameter, relevant high speed output

point may be use in common Y point.

LD ladder diagram programming

LD work area

At LD work area proceed the LD language edit, as add network. delete

network. regulate network sequence, series or parallel switch, add . delete

instruction etc..
 Switch edit

Series a switch:click button or press "F9".

Parallel a switch:click button or press "F10".

Parallel branch: click tools bar button , mouse change to , mouse

move to the start position will be parallel branch (X0 switch position) and

click , then mouse move to the end position (X2 switch position ) and click,

thus complete a parallel branch.

Mouse click or use keyboard move the gridlines to switch position, then

may select the switch. Can input the switch component . change the switch

status, can copy . cut. delete etc. operation .

Switch status change

Mouse click or use keyboard move the gridlines to switch position

which needed change the status, use shortcut key or mouse right button

callout right button menu then may change switch status.

LD instruction edit
Double click project manager instruction name in the instruction tree then

may add the instruction to the network, also may use drag mode pull the

instruction to the relevant position .

Support keyboard input instruction , input instruction name first character

will automatic popup instruction input window, input instruction name then

press enter may add instruction, may press "ESC" close the window at any

time.

Mouse click or use keyboard move the gridlines to instruction position,

press enter may input or modify the instruction parameter.

After select the instruction, may copy. cut. delete the instruction, also may

move up. move down the instruction sequence.

Double click instruction may open "instruction attribute" window, complete

change instruction mode. set instruction forbidden. set timer time base etc.

operation .Double click input. output item may open " Item" window, via

configuration mode input the item parameter.

Change status of the instruction input item

When mouse move to the instruction input item will turn up a red box,

use mouse right button callout right button menu then may change

instruction input item status (Normal open. Normal close. Rising edge.

Failling edge).

Branch edit

LD language support parallel output and branch output mode execute

the instruction, if the same logical condition to execute the instruction then
use parallel output; if not the same logical condition to execute instruction

then use branch output.

As follows, the same logical condition to execute the instructions FSIN.

FCOS and FTAN then use parallel output.

As follows, not the same logical condition to execute instruction COMM.LB

and CTOF then use branch output.

Add instruction default to parallel output, branch output need first add new

branch then add instruction.

Click Tools bar button , mouse change to , mouse move to the

position which will be added branch and click then may add new branch,

new branch add to behind the current branch .

Before add branch as follows:

After add branch as follows:

Click Tools bar button ,mouse change to ,mouse move to the position

which will be deleted branch and click then may delete the branch.

Before delete the branch as follows:

After delete the branch as follows:

 Network edit

Click button or use shortcut key Ctrl+L add a new network.

Click button or use shortcut key Ctrl+I insert a new network.

Mouse pull down at the network, may select current network or many

networks, selected network content will display reverse, press "Del" key

may delete, also may cut. copy . paste etc. operation .

Mouse double click network title may edit the network comment, when

gridlines at the network title position may direct input the network comment.

FBD function block programming

FBD work area

At FBD work area process FBD language edit, as add new page. add.

delete instruction. connect instruction. change instruction execute

sequence etc..
Top of FBD instruction are the function block number and it executed

sequence number , as:"F3_(3)","F3" express the third function block ,"_(3)"

press the function block executed sequence number is 3.

Change the connecting line between instruction system will automatic

regulation the function block executed sequence, also may manual

regulation the function block executed sequence.

FBD instruction edit

Double click project manager instruction name in the instruction tree then

may add the instruction to the network, also may use drag mode pull the

instruction to the relevant position .

Support keyboard input instruction , input instruction name first character

will automatic popup instruction input window, input instruction name then

press enter may add instruction, may press "ESC" close the window at any

time.

Mouse click or use keyboard move the gridlines to instruction position,

press enter may input or modify the instruction parameter.

Via mouse drag box may select any instruction, may copy. cut. delete the

instruction.

Double click instruction may open "instruction attribute" window, complete

change instruction mode. set instruction forbidden. set timer time base etc.
operation .Double click input. output item may open " Item" window, via

configuration mode input the item parameter.

FBD connect between instructions

FBD between instructions connected by enable flow line.

Click Tools bar button , mouse change to , mouse moce to

instruction input or output item, if enable connect then mouse change to

, if disable connect mouse change to .

Instruction output item can not connect to self input item, input item only a

enable flow line input, output item may be output many enable flow lines .

Enable flow line connected will automatic change function block instruction

executed sequence.

Between instruction may connect not use enable flow line , direct input

instruction parameter.

Mouse click enable flow line will prompt the enable flow line detail connect

information.
 Change FB executed sequence

Mouse right button click instruction, callout right button menu click

[Change FB executed sequence], input new executed sequence, press

"Confirm" . If between FB connected via enable flow line , new executed

sequence can not change enable flow line sequence.

Change instruction input status

When mouse move to the instruction input item will turn up a blue box,

use mouse right button callout right button menu then may change

instruction input item status (Normal open. Normal close. Rising edge.

Failling edge).
 Page edit

Click button add a new page.

Click button delete the last page, if the page have instruction then can

not be deleted.

FBD comment

FBD language may write comment to each instruction, double click

instruction may open "instruction attribute" window, at "Comment" box

input the comment.

IL instruction list programming

IL work area
 At IL work area process IL language edit, as add. delete instruction.

move up or move down instruction etc..

IL instruction edit

Double click Project manager instruction name in the instruction tree then

may add the instruction to the tail of the program, also may use drag mode

pull the instruction to the relevant position .

Support keyboard input instruction , input instruction name first character

will automatic popup instruction input window, input instruction name then

press enter may add instruction, may press "ESC" close the window at any

time.
Mouse click or use keyboard move the gridlines to instruction position,

press enter may input or modify the instruction parameter.

Via mouse drag box may select any instruction, may copy. cut. delete the

instruction, also may move up. move down instruction executed sequence.

Double click instruction may open "instruction attribute" window, complete

change instruction mode. set instruction forbidden. set timer time base etc.

operation .Double click input. output item may open " Item" window, via

configuration mode input the item parameter.

Change the instruction input status

When mouse move to the instruction input item, use mouse right button

callout right button menu then may change instruction input item status
(Normal open. Normal close. Rising edge. Failling edge).

IL comment

IL language may write comment to each instruction, double click

instruction may open "instruction attribute" window, at "Comment" box

input the comment.

Others

Find and replace

Via menu[Edit/Find]or shortcut key "Ctrl+F" open "Find" window, may

find any instruction. component or constant , may replace component or

constant.
Find the instruction.

Find or replace the component or constant.

Via menu[Edit/Go To...] or shortcut key "Ctrl+G" open "Go To..." window,

may realize fast position. LD language fast position to

network,FBD language fast position to function block ,IL language fast

position to line.
 Compile program

During write the program may compiled the program at any time, to

check the program whether or not have error. Via menu[Debug/Compile

program ] or click tools bar button start compile operation .Compile

window as follows:

Download program or start simulator to executed program, system

automatic start compile operation , only have not any error the program

may be downloaded or started simulator to executed.

Compile window will list the error number and alarm number and them

detail information of compile result .Double click error or alarm information

may fast position the position in the program which generated the error or

alarm , convenience user modify the program .

Error number is 0 express no error, alarm number is 0 express no alarm.

Program error must be modified, alarm information may be ignored.

 Program and table import

Via menu [File/Import] open "Import" window.

Click " program ". "Table". "Component comment table" select the imported

file type ,click "Open " button select the imported file.
click "Import" button import the file to current program project.

Program and table export

May export the current program project program block . table and

component comment, convenience at other program project import to use.

Via menu [File/Export] open "Export" window, select exported content and

press "Export" button.

ote: if program block . table have set password protect, then exported file

have the same password.

Print and preview

If you need print the program content via project file mode, via

menu[File/Print]or click tools bar button ,open "Print" window.

Select the content will be printed,click "Print" button open " print attribute

window, In the window may select print copies. pages etc. information, also

may select "Print to file" output.

Via menu [File/Print preview] or click tools bar button preview the

content will be printed.

 Component used table

"Component used table" list current program project all components be

used, also detail statistics the component read times. write times and

instruction automatic occupy continuous components (read/write) times.

Note: if "Write times" add

"instruction automatic occupy continuous components write times" greater

than 1, then express the component have multiple output situation.
 Component comment

PLC programming software supply abundant comment function, as:

component comment. network comment. instruction comment. program

block comment. table comment and program project comment etc.,

comment may be selected download to PLC, convenience in the future

upload the program read and modify.

Component comment may use after the component follow "//" direct input,

as: X0//motor start,X0 is component, "motor start" is the comment of X0.

Component comment may be batch edited, via menu [Tools/Batch

component comment] open "Batch component comment" window.

Press "Export" button may export all component comment to file.

Press "Import" button may import component comment from external

comment file.
Simulate and online debugging
This section introduce the how to use the program software built-in

simulator and the method of online debug the program.

Overview
Program software built-in simulator ( offline simulate), entirety realize

the PLC program simulate running . When you are programming of after

completed the program , can use the simulator simulate running the PLC

program in entirely break away from PLC, in order to check up program

executed whether or not correct, vastly reduce the debug time at local ,

reduce the debug difficulty , improve the debug efficiency.

Program software supply abundant debug tools , expedience online

debug program, can search the whole PLC which connected the PLC,

display all online PLC running status . fault status . RUN/STOP switch

position. hardware configure . communication port parameter etc. detail

information, can select any PLC process online monitor, look up all PLC

component value or status.

Simulation environment
At simulating or online monitoring , the bottom of main windows will

appear a "PLC hardware simulator windows". all divide into four page
windows : message windows. curve real time monitoring . locked data

table . PLC hardware simulator windows, at the same time appear

simulate tools bar at top left corner, cooperate right-hand button menu,

make the simulate still more close to real environment.

Simulate tools bar

Simulate tools bar use for control the power off. power on. start. stop.

pause and continues operate of the simulator.

Right-click menu

At simulating or monitoring status, click right-hand button can callout

right-click menu. Right-click menu support still further comprehensive

simulate operation and others debug tools.

Stop simulator: finish current simulating status, return edit status.

Force ON: force the bit component status to ON of the mouse position.

Force OFF: force the bit component status to OFF of the mouse

position.

Force: open " force " window, force component status or value.

Lock data: open " Lock " window, lock component status or value.

Unlock data: release the component locked data of the mouse position.

Unlock all the data: release all the component locked data.
 Component status table : open " component status table ",can arbitrarily

monitor all components status or value of PLC.

Power off/power on: simulate PLC power off/power on.

0. Start: control the simulator start running.

. Stop:control the simulator stop running.

2. Pause:control the simulator pause running.

3. Continue:control the simulator continue running.

4. Decimal: according to decimal display data value.

5. Hexadecimal :according to hexadecimal display data value.

6. Find: open " find " window, find component or instruction in the

program.

Hardware simulate window

" Hardware simulate window " list the hardware configure of current

program project , display the name of MPU and module and all X(DI)or

Y(DO) channel status and AI. AQ channel value.

Click X or Y channel may be force the channel status.

Click AI or AQ channel may be open "AI/AO simulate window" to modify

the channel value.

AI/AQ simulate window

Click " hardware simulate window " AI or AQ channel may be open "

AI/AO simulate window ",window display the channel's signal type.

signal value. signal value corresponding quantities or code value etc. ,

can modify the channel value( can modify AI and AQ in simulate status ,

only AQ can be modified in online monitor status).

 Data lock window

" data lock window " list all locked component and them status or

value.

Real time curve window

" Real time curve window " according real time curve to monitor the

change trend of register component value, expedience user process

dynamic watch and debug some important parameter.

Message window

" Message " display the system message during simulating or

debugging process, as interrupt message. system error message.

communication error message etc., user can check the message at the

window to be informed of current program running status.

Simulate operation

General steps of simulation

Start simulator , enter into simulate status.

In accordance with force the component, modify the component status or

value, make program as far as possible executed in simulate the real

local actual condition . In simulating process, can use " component

status table ". " real time curve monitor " or "PLC hardware simulate "

etc. numerous simulate debug tools for monitor the result of the program

simulate running, to checking the result whether or not correct of the

program executing .

If the program have communication instruction , then may be start "

communication simulator " simulate the return data from slave device.

If the program have interpolation etc. motion control instructions, then

may be start " interpolation simulator " according to diagram the result of

simulate interpolation output.

Simulate PLC power OFF/power ON, check the program still can normal

work after the power off.

Stop simulator ,return to edit status. If the result of the program not

correct , then simulate executing after modify the program.

Start simulator

Click menu [debug/ start simulator] or click tools bar button to

start simulator ,System auto compile the current project ,if there are error

or alarm after the program compiled, if there are error or alarm after the

program compiled, will popup the windows as follows.

List all error and alarm information in the listing frame , double click the

error or alarm information , program will be accurate fixed position the

location which generated the error or alarm , expedience user modify

the program.
If there is error during compiling the program , simulator can not be

started , until user modify the program have not any error and then the

simulator can be started .

If there is no error or only alarm during compiling the program , simulator

can be started . If there is alarm information , suggest you modify the

program until there is no any alarm information and then start simulator .

After simulator started , programer software enter into offline simulate

status . At simulate status , can not modified the program , only after

stop simulator and return to edit status , just can be modified the

program

omponent monitor

At simulate or online monitor status , may be through the program

edit area . component status table . hardware configure windows etc.

monitor the component status and value , and the instruction execute

situation . Below is the program edit area which is at simulate or online

monitor .
When the instruction frame is red, express the instruction is executing

correct ; when is blue, express the instruction did not executed or

executed error( the instruction parameter error ,as DIV instruction divisor

is 0).

Register will display it current value , may be via menu [ check\decimal.

hexadecimal] change the register display model.

Floating point number or character format component will automatic

display according to the defined of the instruction item . As up drawing

:CTOF instruction, Sou input is character , so character display V3='+

199.8kg',Out item output is floating point number , so floating point

display V100=199.8.
Constant open switch and the compare switch have red diamonds ,

express the switch is connected , otherwise not connected. Note: the

status of constant close and constant open is opposite ; rising edge and

descend edge because is edge ,only generate edge connect once, rest

time not connected.

The red frame of the component , express the status of component is

ON, otherwise is OFF.

If component with , express the component data locked.

Double clock the component can be forced the component status or

value.

Component status table

" component status table " can monitor current status or value of the

all component of the PLC, maximum may build 10 status tables, allow

display the register value according to different data formation. Only

usable in simulate or online monitor .

Click menu [ debug/component status table ] or click tool bar button,

open " component status table "

Click " component " bar nether blank space, At input frame input the

component or component range, e.g. :as up drawing input V0-8. V100.

V1000-1005. M0.

For register component display is "16 bit register value " and "32 bit

register value ".Note:"32 bit register value" column display border upon 2

continuous registers value,as up drawing first line V0 component "32 bit

register value" is V1V0 value.

If component with , express the component data locked.

Double clock the component can be forced the component status or

value.

Right-hand button click may be popup the right-hand menu , via right-

hand menu may be forced . locked . release locked. add or delete status

table. to lead all kinds of data table component operation , may be

change the display format of the register( include decimal base. floating

point. character) etc. .

Force
 Force change component status or value.

Bit component be forced: at " type " select bit component type , at "

component " input component number, select ON or OFF status, if X

component is external high speed pulse input point then can select input

pulse frequency value, click " force " button.

Register component be forced: at " type " select register component

type , at " component " input component number, input the value be

forced, may be input 16 bit integer . 32 bit integer. floating point number

or character,"HEX" selected express input hexadecimal integer , click "

force " button .

Character input as follows. each register store two character , when

select " low byte mode ",each register only store one character .

Lock data

Status or value of the component be locked, make component value

not change, until release locked.

Bit component be locked: at " type " select bit component type , at "

component " input component number, select ON or OFF status,click "

force " button.

Register component be locked: at " type " select register component

type , at " component " input component number, input the value be

locked, may be input 16 bit integer . 32 bit integer. floating point number

or character,"HEX" selected express input hexadecimal integer , click "

force " button .

Character input as follows. each register store two character , when

select " low byte mode ",each register only store one character .
 Difference between force and lock:

1. Force only assign to component , program arithmetic output. external

device communication input etc. will change the component status or

value.

2. Lock fixed the status or value of the component , whether program

arithmetic output. external device communication input etc. will not

refresh it ,until release locked.

3. At on line monitor , can not force external input component status or

value (such as digital input X and analog input AI). May be locked the

status or value of external input component.

 [Note]

1. Please use the lock data function carefully, lock data might be produce

unforeseeable effect.

2. If locked data in PLC, will generate error code 142, be "SV3=142 have

locked data ", to remind user pay attention to it.

3. If really need use lock data function , expedience handle location

problem, please release the locked data after the location problem

handled finish.

Real time curve

At simulate or PLC on line monitor status, real time change of the

register component ( such as V. AI. AQ etc. ) value may be use real time

curve mode visualize expression it ,expedience user proceed dynamic

observe and debug to some important parameters .

1. At " component " input the register component to be monitored.

2. At " upper limit value " and " lower limit value " input the register upper

limit value and lower limit value .

3. Tick the leftmost select box, express draw real time curve of the

component.

4. Register component default 16 bit integer ,if 32 bit integer must be tick

"32 bits" select box, if floating point number must be tick " floating point

number " select box.

5. " Pause " option pause the curve drawing. during pause, may be use

left mouse button click the point of the curve to read the point value .

Power off simulate

All control system or device all might be power off, strong control

program should consider the device power off factor fully , make sure the

program still can proper functioning after power off then power on.

Click simulator tool bar button ,simulate PLC power off , the program

stop executing.
Click simulator tool bar button ,simulate PLC again power on , the

program again start executing.

Via simulate power off/power on procedure, may be test program

whether or not proper functioning after power off then power on, may be

check parameter whether or not lost etc. problem.

Communication simulator
" Communication simulator " is a simulation tool be exclusively used

in debug the communication instruction. It may manual operation

simulate input response information from slave, also my be use the

computer reality serial port communicate with salve , reality simulate

PLC execute communication instruction process and handle the data

return from slave.

Start communication simulator

At simulation status , click menu [debug/communication simulator] or

click tools bar button to start " communication simulator ", default "

manual input response information from slave" mode.

Upper left message frame display the executing communication

instruction. the instruction sent command frame data. slave response

data etc. , message frame scroll display all communication instruction

executed and generate the send and receive data . press " clear " button

clear all message , tick " Pause " stop refresh communication instruction

executed and generate the send and receive data .

Left lower frame use for manual input return response information from

slave.
Right list all communication instruction using the same communication

port , add identification at the executing communication instruction,

double click instruction may fixed position the instruction location at the

program.

Each communication port used by communication instruction will

generate a alone page, page title display the communication port

number and number of instructions which using the communication port.

Manual input slave response information

When upper left message frame display " wait response" , at left lower

input frame input response data frame from slave ( data content please

according to the communication protocol specification of the slave

),press " enter" ,response data will be automatic wrote to communication

instruction output register .

"Hex". "ASCII" use for select Hexadecimal or ASCII code mode input and

display data .

"CRC". "LRC". "BCC" and "SUM" button use for calculate the check code

of the input data.

"Cr" input enter symbol,"Lf" input line break.

Use reality serial port communicate with slave

Tick " use reality serial port communicate with slave " enter use computer

reality serial port reality communicate with slave mode, communication

instruction send command frame to slave via computer serial port , also

receive response data from slave, response data automatic wrote to

communication instruction output register. Reality send and receive data

all will be scroll displayed in the message box.

"PC port " listbox list the total serial port of the computer , out of select

the reality serial port connect to the slave .

High speed counter simulate

High speed counter support:pulse/direction . positive/negative pulse .

A/B phase pulse input model, support 1. 2. 4 frequency multiplication

counting model .
[High speed counter mode and pulse oscillogram ]

Counting mode Pulse oscillogram

Frequency Decrease
Mode Increase count
multiplication count

0 --pulse/direction 1

1 --pulse/direction 2

2 --
1
foreward/reversal

3 --
2
foreward/reversal

4 -- A/B phase 1
 Counting mode Pulse oscillogram

Frequency Decrease
Mode Increase count
multiplication count

5 -- A/B phase 2

6 -- A/B phase 4

High speed counter channel express by HSCx , each channel use 2 high

speed pulse input point .Can force input frequency of the high speed

pulse input point.

Method of simulate pulse input, use HSC0 channel for example.

A. Pulse/direction (X0 is pulse singal,X1 is direction singal): force X0

pulse frequency to 20Hz,X1=OFF, now is increase counting

force X0 pulse

frequency to 20Hz,X1=ON, now is decrease counting

 B. positive/negative pulse(X0 is positive pulse,X1 is negative pulse):

force X0 pulse frequency to 20Hz,X1=OFF, now is increase counting

force

X0=OFF,X1pulse frequency to 20Hz,now is decrease counting

C. A/B phase pulse(X0 is A phase pulse,X1 is B phase pulse): first force

X0 pulse frequency to 20Hz, then force X1pulse frequency to 20Hz ,now

is increase counting (A phase pulse before)

first force X1pulse

frequency to 20Hz , then force X0 pulse frequency to 20Hz,now is

decrease counting (B phase pulse before)

During high speed counter simulate execute process will generate

corresponding system interrupt, as follows .

rogram example:
Pulse output simulate

High speed pulse output support :single pulse. pulse/direction .

positive/negative pulse . A/B phase pulse . synchronization pulse output,

total 5 output mode, high speed pulse output channel express via PLSx ,

each channel use 2 high speed pulse output point.

Method of simulate pulse output, use PLS1 channel for example .

A. Single pulse output(Y2 is pulse signal): Y2 blink during pulse output ;

no pulse output Y2=OFF.

B. Pulse/direction output (Y2 is pulse signal,Y3 is direction signal): Y2

blink during positive pulse output,Y3=OFF.

Y2 blink

during negative pulse output,Y3=ON.

no pulse

output Y2=OFF,Y3=OFF.

C. Positive/negative pulse output (Y2 is positive pulse signal,Y3 is

negative pulse):Y2 blink during positive pulse output,Y3=OFF.

 Y2=OFF

during negative pulse output,Y3 blink.

no pulse

output Y2=OFF,Y3=OFF.

D. A/B phase pulse output(Y2 is A phase pulse,Y3 is B phase pulse):Y2 .

Y3 blink during pulse output ;no pulse output Y2=OFF. Y3=OFF.

E. Synchronization pulse output (Y2 is pulse,Y3 is synchronization

pulse): Y2 . Y3 blink during pulse output ;no pulse output Y2=OFF.

Y3=OFF.

During high speed pulse output instruction simulate execute process will

generate corresponding system interrupt, as follows .

rogram example:
 Interpolation simulate

There is interpolation instruction in the program ,under simulate status,

may be start " interpolation simulator" to observe interpolation

instruction generate motion trail .

. Click menu [debug/interpolation simulator] or click tool bar button

,start " interpolation simulator".

" interpolation simulator" tool bar.

A. Click , interpolation instruction executed generate motion trail will be

draw. Click stop draw. Note: interpolation instruction executed is

controlled by program, if no instruction executed there is no motion trail

be generated.

B. Click , may be select different plane coordinates .select

consistent coordinate with actual motion platform , more convenience of

user observe motion trail.

C. Click , may be select the line color of each

coordinate axis .

D. Tick be display motion tracing point coordinate ,

no tick then hide point coordinate .

E. Click , may be pull the origin of coordinates to middle of the drawing

zone .

F. Click , may be clear the motion trail .

Interpolation instruction executed generate motion trail will be draw on

plane coordinates, different motion plane will be display paging.

At middle part list motion plane each axis corresponding pulse output

channel parameter, display the channel current position. mechanical

 origin position. output mode etc. , may be set axial length. unit pulse

count.

Bottom is message box, display executing interpolation instruction and

trail describe .

ircular interpolation program example:

Difference between online debugging and
offline simulate

Off line simulate : no need reality PLC, program running in simulator,

modify the component status or data value and program execution result
output only happen in simulator .

On line debug: programming software must on line with PLC, program

download to PLC to execute ,modify the component status or data value

and program execution result output happen in PLC ,real time response

external input singal (DI or AI), output signal (DO or AO) produce real

control effect to the external device.

Online control PLC
The section introduce use programming software online control the

PLC.

PLC station number setting up

Via hardware 4 bit DIP switch setting up PLC station number( also

name station address. communication address). legal station number is

1~254(0 is broadcast address).4 bit DIP may be express decimal

number 1~15( binary number from 0001 ~ 1111), method of modify the

station number via DIP switch as follow:

Up picture is the 4 bit DIP switch use to set the station number of the

PLC, above is ON, below is OFF, in the picture black part express the

switch position, the bit set side to ON express the bit is 1, set side to

OFF express the bit is 0, first bit in up picture is ON, other bits are OFF.

The first bit of the DIP switch express the 0 bit of binary(b0), the fourth

bit of the DIP switch express third bit of binary(b3),thus ,such as the DIP

switch in up picture express 0001,also decimal data is 1, express the

PLC station is 1(default is 1 when leave factory); If set the 1. 2 bits to

ON side, moreover others witch set to OFF side ,then be 0011, also

decimal data is 3, express PLC station number is 3.

 If 4xbit DIP switch express the hardware address not enough to use,

may be via menu[PLC/Set PLC parameter] setting up PLC soft address.

As follows:

Tick "Use PLC soft address", input PLC address value, click "Confirm"

. After use PLC soft address the hardware 4 bit DIP switch will be invalid.

Online with PLC

Only after online to PLC succeed, then may be control the PLC

connected in the network , such as upload download program. online

monitor etc..
Click menu[PLC/PLC online] or click tools bar button, open "PLC

online" window.

Set the relate parameter, general condition use default parameter not

need set modify.

PC port: select the serial port for computer communicate to PLC.

Useable COM serial port number in the listing different according to

the computer , system will automatic search all useable COM serial

port of the computer to user for select by user.

 Baud rate: select communication baud rate, system default is

19200.

Data format: select communication data format, system default

is "N,8,2 RTU".

Start address. end address: if communicate to single PLC, use

"Stand-alone search" option ; if communicate to many PLCs, then

"Start address" input the minimum station number of the PLC, "End

address" input the maximum station number of the PLC.

Append to listing. cover listing: select the already online PLCs

use append or cover to the listing.

Overtime : set the overtime of build communicate between

computer and PLC. RS232 or RS485 etc. wired mode online default

200ms , wireless mode online (ex. via GPRS) must according to the

wireless communicate delay condition then set a biggish value,

general suggest around 5000ms.

Stand-alone search: if communicate to single PLC, use "Stand-

alone search" option ; if communicate to many PLCs, then must

cancel "Stand-alone search" option moreover set "Start address"

and "End address".

Online operation
 Online: direct click "Online" button, searched PLC (online

succeed) will be display in the listing.

Search: if forget about the baud rate etc. communication

parameters, may be click "Find" button to search, search function

will try all baud rate . all data format to communicate with the PLC,

so need spend longer time for waitting for search the PLC, searched

PLC (online succeed) will be display in the listing.

Click "Exit", close "PLC online" window.

If online unsuccessful ,chances are below cause, look over to exclusion

the problem, if can not exclusion please connect the technical support .

A. Selected PC serial port not correct.

B. Selected communication parameter and the communication

parameter of the PLC are different .

C. PLC power off.

D. Communication cable connected wrong or not connected well.

E. Use "USB convert to RS232 serial port data line" not correct installed

the driver.

Online PLC window

At "PLC online" windows if have searched PLC (online succeed),

after exit "PLC online" window will automatic open "Online PLC

window", as follows.
On the left side of the upper is PLC listing , here display the already

connected PLCs. May be double click any PLC in the listing to select be

current PLC, all online operation of the PLC as: upload download
parameter. firmware upgrade etc. only for current PLC, don't influence

others PLC.

On the left side of the bottom is monitor zone , online monitoring use for

display current PLC detail status ,as: PLC running status. program big

or small. version. whether password. series port parameter. master and

extend modules type version etc. information.

Download program
Download current program project (hardware configuration. program.

comment) to target PLC. Before download system automatic compile the

current program project, if the program compiled error, then list all error,

after user modify the program until have not any error then can be

downloaded . Alarm information only prompt the user pay attention to

them , if no error only alarm information , then may be downloaded.

Click menu[PLC/PLC program download] or click tools bar button,

open "PLC program download" window.

Can choose to download content: Hardware configuration, Program,

Comments, Initial register table.

Forbid upload: if tick the option, downloaded program can not be

uploaded. This way protect the intellectual property of the user program .

With eliminate function download: if tick the option, during download

automatic initialize the PLC, include clear program. power of latched

area etc., then download the program.

Without stop download: if tick the option, during download program the

PLC will not stop executing, thus online modify program. Please careful
use the function, did not debugged program maybe produce cannot

foresee result.

Hardware match: listing detail list the match status between "Program

project configuration" and "Target PLC configuration", hardware

configuration information must the same. If hardware configuration not

the same, program downloaded to target PLC will produce error code

140, thus "SV3=140 hardware configuration not matched". User need

according to the listing prompt modify the different hardware

configuration to the same, then again download the program to

guarantee PLC proper functioning.

Modify hardware configuration information: if there is "CPU module"

different, please via menu [File/Program project attribute] modify CPU

module type; if there is "Extend module number or type" different, please

via menu [Check/PLC hardware configuration] open "PLC hardware

configuration" window and then add subtract or modify the module.

Click "Download" button download the program to PLC.

Upload program
 Upload the target PLC program to the computer. If the program

selected "Forbid upload" during downloaded, then the program can not

be uploaded.

Click menu [PLC/PLC program upload ] or click tools bar button, open

"PLC program upload " window.

Click "Upload" button, upload the target PLC program to computer.

Generate PLC executable file

The programmable software generate PLC executable file from the

PLC project, and the file can be released and downloaded to the PLC

lonely,but it cannot be edited.

Clicking menu[File/Generate PLC executable file],open the window that

is called "Generate PLC executable file".

"PLC password". "PLC comfirm password": if PLC is setuped

password,it should be input password to download the PLC executable

file to the PLC.

Clicking "generate" button,that will generate the executable file.

Download PLC executable file

Downloading the executable file to PLC,whose program whill not be

uploaded..
Clicking menu[PLC/Download PLC executable file]or clicking button of

toolbar,open the window called "Open PLC executable file".

Chosing PLC executable file,opening the window called"Download PLC

executable file".
Clicking "Download" button,so that downloaded PLC executable file to

PLC.if the hardware is not compatible with target or the password is not

correct ,the file will be not downloaded.

PLC firmware upgrade

Update the firmware program of the PLC CPU MPU or extend

module, make CPU MPU oe extend module support the new function.

Click menu [PLC/PLC firmware upgrade ], open "PLC firmware upgrade

" window
Click "Open" button, select the upgrade file according to the upgraded

module.
At "PLC firmware upgrade " window, up table listed firmware upgrade file

version. module type etc. information, bottom listed target PLC name.

CPU module and extend module etc. hardware configuration information,

at "Select upgrade module" box select upgraded module number,

module number 0 express CPU module, extend module from 1 begin

according to from left to right sequence arrange.

Click "Upgrade" button, upgrade the firmware program of PLC CPU

MPU or extend module.

 Note: if interrupt during upgrading because power off or other

reasons ,must rerun firmware upgrade until upgrade successful.

Start or stop PLC

Via programming software control PLC start or stop, make it

RUN/STOP status, realize remote control PLC start or stop.

Click menu [PLC/Start PLC running] start PLC running.

Click menu [PLC/Stop PLC running] stop PLC running.

[Note]

1. At PLC CPU MPU set a start stop switch, when switch at "STOP"

position, PLC be stop status; when switch at "RUN" position, PLC be run

status.

2. The relation between start stop switch and programming software

"Start or stop PLC running" function: according to start stop switch prior,

when PLC power off again power on, if start stop switch at STOP

position, then now PLC will be stop status; if start stop switch at RUN

position, then now PLC will automatic change to run status. only PLC at

power on status , programming software maybe proceed "Start PLC

running" or "Stop PLC running" control, no matter start stop switch at any

position.

3. If start stop switch at STOP position, after download program or

module firmware upgrade complete, PLC will be STOP status; if start

stop switch at RUN position, after download program or module firmware

upgrade complete, PLC will be RUN status.

4. User control "Start PLC running" or "Stop PLC running" via the

programming software, must guarantee locate safety, because of avoid

harm for person and machine.

Clear PLC program

Initialize target PLC, clear include program. hardware configuration.

power off latched zone etc..

Click menu [PLC/Clear PLC program]

Affirm whether or not clear PLC program, if select "Yes", will initialize the

PLC. If select "No", no any operation to the PLC.

If PLC set password protect, will prompt user input the password, only

the password correct, maybe clear the target PLC program. Also prompt

user whether or not clear the PLC password after clear the PLC

program, if want clear the PLC password, select yes. Then PLC

password will be retained.

Program compare
Compare between the current program project and the target PLC.

distinguish list "Program content" and "Hardware configuration" whether

or not the same.

PLC Diagnosis
To comprehensive diagnosis PLC of online, PLC listed all of the

information system, convenient for the user can quickly find the problem

in exceptional cases.
Set PLC password
Set target PLC password, use for protect the PLC program and
hardware configuration etc. information. After set the password, include

program upload . program download. program clear etc. must after input

correct password then be executed.

Click menu [PLC/Set PLC password ], open "Set PLC password "

window.
 .

At password and confirm password field, input the same password , click

"Confirm" complete set the password.

If PLC already set password , user want modify or cancel the password

,click menu [PLC/Set PLC password ], open " password checking"

window, input "Original password ", after password checked correct will

open "Set PLC password " window, again set new password, password

is empty express no password be set (thus clear password ).

Set PLC clock

Set target PLC real time clock.
Click menu [PLC/Set PLC clock ], open "Set PLC clock " window.

. Click "Confirm" button maybe set the computer current data and time to

the PLC real time clock.

If want to regulation computer current clock , click 《 clock 》 button,

maybe modify the computer data and time.

Set PLC communication parameter

Set target PLC each communication parameter.

Click menu [PLC/Set PLC communication parameter], open "Set PLC

communication parameter" window.

PLC port: select the PLC communication port be set. CPU MPU built-in 2

communication ports(RS232 is COM1,RS485 is COM2). Extend

communication port according to reality sequence distinguish are COM3.

COM4. COM5.

Baud rate: select communication baud rate.

Data format: select communication data format.

Overtime time: set communication overtime time.

Click " Confirm" button, maybe set PLC communication port

communication parameter.
 Note: all the communication port default parameter is 19200

N,8,2 RTU, suggest use the default parameter.

Set PLC parameter

Set target PLC name. program scan overtime time and PLC soft

address.

Click menu [PLC/Set PLC parameter], open "Set PLC parameter"

window.
Set PLC name maybe convenience distinguish many PLCs on the

network, PLC name support maximum 6 chinese characters or 12

english characters. numeral.

PLC scan overtime time: thus watch dog time, unit is milliscond (ms).

When PLC program running reality scan time greater than the value, will

generate error code 141, thus "SV3=141 scan overtime, watch dog

action". PLC stop running.

Tick "Use PLC soft address", input PLC address value , click " Confirm".

After use PLC soft address the hardware 4 DIP switch will be invalid.
Networking communicate function
This section introduce PLC networking communicate function.

Feature

Support many communication protocol: built-in Modbus RTU/ASCII

protocol . freedom communication protocol and Speedbus high speed

communication protocol .

Support 5 communication ports: all type MPU built-in 2

communication ports (RS-232 + RS-485), may be extended to 5

communication ports , each communication port may be mutual

independence or simultaneously working, the same function of all

communication port , all can use for program . upload download

program. monitor . networking, all communication port support master

or slave communicate mode .

Networking flexible: support 1:N. N:1. N:N networking mode, support

all kinds of human-machine interface and configuration software, can be

networking with the third part device which has communication function (

such as inverter . instrument. bar code scanner etc.).

Highly convenient communication instruction: make you whether

use any communication protocol only need one communication

instruction can complete complex communication function,programming

simpleness, many communication instruction may be executed at the

same time, need not be worried about communication port conflict .

send receive control. communication interrupt handle etc. problem , may

be mix use all kinds of protocol easy complete you need communication

function.

Total communication instruction bring OUT output: may be express

the communication instruction executed succeed and fail, may be

explicit pointing communicate fail with the slave, expedience location

debug and fault judge.

May be convenience netwoking with the third part communication

instruction:support different baud rate . different protocol format .

different manufacturer equipment networking in the the same 485

networking.

Extend module with communication port may be action a remote IO

module: PLC extend module built-in a RS485 communication port

,already support parallel bus ( use extend bus connect to the parallel
interface of the PLC MPU ) also support serial bus ( use communication

instruction control remote module via RS485 communication port of

MPU ),When expand via serial bus (remote IO module), don't limit by

system expand point ,may distributed installation .This very important for

a large number of disperse digital or analog signal(temperature.

humidity. differential pressure. blowing rate. flow. fan rotate speed. valve

open degree etc. ) need be sampled and monitored in the system, easy

realize distributed installation moreover no expand point limited , vastly

improve control system configuration flexible and in the future expand

capacity, reduce wire and work load of all kinds of signal , meanwhile

reduce disturb because analog signal wire too long, save project invest

cost.

Upper computer (HMI . configuration software etc. )use Modbus

protocol access :PLC action slave need no any communication

program, each component corresponding Modbus communication

address code refer to "communication address code table "

Modbus communication
PLC built-in Modbus RTU/ASCII protocol ,when the third part device

(as inverter . servo controller. instrument etc.) support Modbus protocol ,

may be use Modbus protocol communicate with it , use MODR (Modbus

read) instruction read data from slave and use MODW (Modbus write)

instruction write data to slave .only 2 instructions, need no any checking

program, it according to communication mode (RTU or ASCII)

automatic verify the return data (CRC or LRC).

[E.X.]

PLC via 485 communication port networking with INOVANCE

MD320 series inverter ,use communication mode set frequency to

inverter and read running frequency from inverter.

[Example program]

1. According to INOVANCE MD320 series inverter communication

protocol (please refer to INOVANCE MD320 series inverter manual

communication section), preset frequency Modbus address is

4096,MODW instruction real time write V80 value to inverter.

2. Running frequency Modbus address is 4097,MODR instruction read

current frequency from inverter and store to V82.

3. MODW. MODR instructions get electricity from busbar and all along

executing, if continuous 3 second communication unsuccessful then

generate communication fail alarm.

Speedbus communication
Speedbus is a efficient high speed communication protocol , have

disperse or continuous . blended data (bit component. register

component) transmittability, have high speed communication and

communication efficiency, once communication maximum complete 30

pen data interactive, there is 2 Speedbus protocol

communication instructions , are the HWRD (Speedbus read instruction

,must define "Speedbus read communication table ") and HWWR

(Speedbus write instruction, must define "Speedbus write

communication table").When single PLC control ability not enough or

control equipment distance disperse , often need use many PLC

proceed substation control, data interaction between each PLC

according to the need .

PLC have powerful networking function , data interaction between

station may be use Speedbus protocol ,also may be use standard

Modbus protocol , whether use any protocol , slave station need no any

program , only need read or write instruction at the master PLC.

[E.X.]

2 PLC via 485 communication port networking, use Speedbus

protocol to exchange data .

[Example program]

1. Only 1#PLC write communication program,2#PLC need no any

communication program.if continuous 3 second communication

unsuccessful then generate communication fail alarm.

2. Define Speedbus read communication table "read 2#PLC data"

as follows:
D
Number Read data
component from ata component
slave wrote to master

1 X0 M10
2 X3 M11
3 V11 V80
 4 V12 V81
5 AI0 V20
6 AI1 V21

3. Define Speedbus write communication table " write 2#PLC

data" as follows:

Number Read data Data component

component from
wrote to slave
master

1 X0 M100
2 X1 M101
3 V0 V100
4 V50 V102
5 Y4 M0
6 Y5 Y0
7 V60 V200
8 V61 V201

4. HWRD. HWWR instructions get electricity from busbar and all

along executing, according to above defined Speedbus read/write

communication table, automatic data exchange with 2#PLC.

Freedom communication
PLC except support standard Modbus protocol and Speedbus

protocol , also support flexible freedom protocol communication

,whether slave equipment use any protocol ,so long as know it protocol

text may be communicate with it.

Freedom communication kernel is read slave communication

protocol text, according to slave protocol demand send correct content

(byte string) to slave, and receive response data from slave then

according to the protocol proceed verify. decompose. account for correct

result, specific refer to

COMM. RCV. XMT instruction.

 Below 2 reality communication example explain how to use the third

part communication protocol realize freedom communication.

[Example 一]
PLC networking communicate with multifunction electric energy
meter which accord with DLT-645 standard ,read the meter constant (

active power ) and current active power total electric energy data

value.

[Example 一 program]

1. According to DLT-645 protocol rule, read the meter constant (

active power ) send command frame:68 07 05 06 00 00 00 68 01

02 63 F3 3B 16 total 14 bytes, meter constant ( active power )

identification coding :0xC030 + 0x3333 = 0xF363, command store

at " read meter constant ( active power )" table.

Number Component default

Declare
value

1 V1000=0x0068 Start symbol

2 V1001=0x0007 Address
3 V1002=0x0005 Address
4 V1003=0x0006 Address
5 V1004=0x0000 Address
6 V1005=0x0000 Address
7 V1006=0x0000 Address
8 V1007=0x0068 Start symbol
9 V1008=0x0001 Control code
10 V1009=0x0002 Data lngth
11 V1010=0x0063 Identification code
12 V1011=0x00F3 Identification code
13 V1012=0x003B Verify code
 14 V1013=0x0016 End symbol

Program use COMM.LB instruction( low byte mode) send low byte
of V1000~V1013 component receive, 17 bytes return data
received store to V920~V928. If 17 bytes data which returned are

:68 07 05 06 00 00 00 68 81 05 63 F3 97 33 33 BB 16,then meter

constant ( active power ) V520=64.

2. According to DLT-645 protocol rule, read current active power

total electric energy send command frame:68 07 05 06 00 00 00

68 01 02 43 C3 EB 16 total 14 bytes, current active power total

electric energy identification code:0x9010 + 0x3333 =

0xC343,store to " read current active power total meter constant "

table.

Number Component default

Declare
value

1 V1020=0x0068 Start symbol

2 V1021=0x0007 Address
3 V1022=0x0005 Address
4 V1023=0x0006 Address
5 V1024=0x0000 Address
6 V1025=0x0000 Address
7 V1026=0x0000 Address
8 V1027=0x0068 Start symbol
9 V1028=0x0001 Control code
10 V1029=0x0002 Data lngth
11 V1030=0x0043 Identification code
12 V1031=0x00C3 Identification code
13 V1032=0x00EB Verify code
14 V1033=0x0016 End symbol

Program use COMM.LB instruction (low byte mode )send

V1020~V1033 component low byte, 18 bytes return data received
store toV940~V948. If 18 bytes data which returned are :68 07 05

06 00 00 00 68 81 06 43 C3 97 C6 33 33 32 16,then current active

power V522=9364.
 [Example 二]
PLC communicate with METTLER TOLEDO T600 weigh terminal
,use it CB920 communication protocol read real time weight value.
[Example 二 program ]

1. According to CB920 communication protocol , read real time

weight and it ASCII code command:READ/CR/LF, thus 6 bytes

command frame:52 45 41 44 0D 0A, command store to " read real

time weight " table.

Number Component default ASCII code

value

1 V1000=0x0052 R
2 V1001=0x0045 E
3 V1002=0x0041 A
 4 V1003=0x0044 D
5 V1004=0x000D /CR
6 V1005=0x000A /LF

Program use COMM.LB instruction (low byte mode) send low byte
of V1000~V1006 component,18 bytes data received store to
V0~V8. If 18 bytes data returned as:53 54 2C 4E 54 2C 2B 20 20

31 39 39 2E 38 6B 67 0D 0A( return ASCII code :ST,NT,+

199.8kg/Cr/Lf), then real time weight V0=199.8.

2. communication simulator .
Hardware manual

Here are resume of PLC hardware, include type. specification. parameter. install guide. wire

drawing. etc.

PLC specification
Item Specification Declare

Program control model Cycle scan model

Refresh once each cycle scan,support

Input/output (I/O) control immediately refresh instruction (MPU and extend
model module)

Execution speed of 0.05us/basic instruction

instruction

LD(ladder) + FBD(function block) + IL( instruction

Program language Accord with IEC 61131-
list)

Program capacity 48K

Flash ROM permanent storage,dispense with

Storage way backup battery

Support edge catch and

X External input X0~X1023 1024 point signal filtering set

External Power-off preserve outp

Y Y0~Y1023 1024 point
can be configured
output

M0~ M12287 12288 point

Power-off preserve area
M Auxiliary relay (default power-off preserve)M1536~M2047 512 can be set freedom
point

Power-off preserve area

T0~T1023 1024 point can be set freedom,time
Timer(output base:10ms. 100ms. 1s b
T
coil) (default power-off preserve)T96~T127 32 point set freedom,T252~T255
1ms
 Item Specification Declare

C0~C255 256 point

Counter(output Power-off preserve area
C can be set freedom
coil) (default power-off preserve)C64~C127 64 point

S0~S2047 2048 point

Power-off preserve area
S Step state bits (default power-off preserve)S156~S255 100 can be set Freedom
point

System state SM0~SM215 216 point

SM
bits

LM Local relay LM0~LM31 32 point

Support quantities
Analog input AI0~AI255 256 point convert. sample times an
AI
register zero point correct

Support quantities
Analog output AQ0~AQ255 256 point convert,power-off
AQ preserve output can be
register
configured

V0~V14847 14848 point

Internal data power-off preserve area
V (default power-off preserve)V1000~V2047 1048 can be set freedom
register
point

Power-off preserve area

TV0~TV1023 1024 point can be set freedom,time
Timer(Current base:10ms. 100ms. 1s
TV
value register) (default power-off preserve)TV96~TV127 32 point can be set
freedom,T252~T255 1m

Power-off preserve area

CV0~CV255 256 point
Counter(Current can be set
CV
value register) (default power-off preserve)CV64~CV127 64 point freedom,CV48~CV79 ar
32 bits,Other are 16 bits

System
SV SV0~SV900 901 point
register

LV Local register LV0~LV31 32 point

 Item Specification Declare

Indexed
P addressing P0~P29 30 point,use for indirect addressing
point

I Interrupt I1-I52 52 point

LBL Lable 255point,use for program skip

-32768~+32767(16
10 Decimal bits),-2147483648~+2147483647(32 bits)

Constant
16 0000~FFFF(16 bits),00000000~FFFFFFFF(32
Hexadecimal bits )

MPU built-in 2 communication

can be program or
Communication port port(RS232/RS485) ,maximum 5 communication
networking(master/slave
port (RS232/RS485) be extended

Modbus RTU/ASCII protocol. freedom

communication protocol. Speedbus speed
Communication protocol communication protocol,Baud rate
1200~115200bps

PLC communication address can be set external

PLC network capacity set,maximum 254,support 1:N. N:1. N:N network

(H/N series built-in

Real time clock(RTC) Display:year/month/day/hour/minute/second/week
battery)

Hardware extended 7 module can be extended

capacity

Have teaching function,7

counting model:1 -
pulse/direction 1 times,2
pulse/direction 2 times,3
positive/reversal pulse 1
High speed counter 8 Channel 200K
times,4 - positive/reversa
pulse 2 times,5 - A/B
phase pulse 1 times,6 -
A/B phase pulse 2 times
- A/B phase pulse 4 time
 Item Specification Declare

5 output models:1 - sing

pulse output,2 -
pulse/direction output,3 -
High speed pulse output 8 Channel 200K positive/reversal pulse
output,4 - A/B phase
pulse output,5 -
Synchronism pulse outp

Float point arithmetic support within 32 bits float point

instruction arithmetic,integer/float point convert arithmetic

Support three level password protect

function(program file passord. program block
password protect password. PLC hardword password) and upload
prohibited function

Other specification
1. Power specification

Item AC supply DC supply

Input power 100~240VAC 24VDC -15%~+20%

supply

Power supply 50~60Hz ---

frequency

Instant surge MAX 20A 1.5ms @220VAC MAX 20A 1.5ms @24VDC

Power output MAX 25VA ---

Permit Power 20ms within @220VAC 10ms within

supply lost

Fuse capacity 2A,250V 2A,250V

When input power's volatge rise to

Action (working) 95~100VAC,PLC will be run,when ---
specification input power volatge drop down to
70VAC,PLC will be stoped.
 Item AC supply DC supply

5VDC 5V,-2%~+2%,1.2A(maximum) 5V,-2%~+2%,1.2A(maximum)

for CPU

24VDC
power
supply
for 24V,-15%~+15%,500
24V,-15%~+15%,500mA(maximum)
output mA(maximum)
Output and
power extend
supply modules

24VDC
power
supply Direct use the 24VDC input power
for input 24V,-15%~+15%,200mA(maximum) supply
and
external
device

Transformer/photoelectricity
Isolation model No electrical isolation
isolation,1500VAC/1 minute

Protect the 24VDC output over the limit of the DC power input polar against. over
power supply current volatge

2. Product environment specification

Item Environment specification

Working temperature: 0 ~ + 55 ℃ storage temperature:

Temperature/Humidity - 25 ~ + 70 ℃ and humidity: 5 ~ 95% RH, no
condensation

10~57Hz range 0.075mm,57Hz~150Hz acceleration

Anti vibration
1G,X. Y. Z three axis 10 times each direction

15G,contiune 11ms,X. Y. Z three axis 6 times each

Anti shock
direction
 Item Environment specification

AC EFT: ± 2500V, surge: ± 2500V, DC EFT: ±2500V,

Anti jamming
surge: ±1000V

Between AC terminal and PE terminal

Over volatge
1500VAC,1min,Between DC terminal and PE terminal
capability
500VAC,1min

Between AC terminal and PE

Insulation impedance terminal@500VDC,>=5MΩ(Between all input/output
terminal and PE terminal@500VDC)

The third grounding(Can not connect to the strong

Earth
power system’s earth)

Operation Operated where no dust, moisture, corrosion, electrical

environment shock and physical shock ,etc.

3. Digital input (DI)specification

Item Digital input DI

Input signal Non-voltage contact or NPN/PNP contact

Action driving ON: 3.5 mA above OFF: below 1.5 mA

Input impedance About 4.3KΩ

Input maximum 10mA

current

Response time Default 6.4ms,Configurable 0.8~51.2ms

Isolation mode Each Channel optical isolation

Input indication LED light means ON,dark means OFF

 Item Digital input DI

PLC internal power supply:DC power(sink or

Power supply source)5.3mA@24VDC

4. Digital output (DO)specification

NPN or PNP
Item Relay output-R
transistor output -T/P

Resistance 2A/1 point,8A/4 point per 0.5A/1 point,2A/4 point

load COM per COM

maximum
load Inductive load 50VA 5W/24VDC

Light load 100W 12W/24VDC

Min. load 10mA 2mA

Voltage specification Below 250VAC,30VDC 30VDC

Drive capability Maximum 5A/250VAC MAX 1A 10S

Off-On 10us,On-Off
Response time Off-on 10ms,On-off 5ms
120us

Leakage current when --- Below 0.1mA

route opened

Each Channel optical

Isolation mode Mechanical isolation
isolation

Output indication LED light means ON ,dark means OFF

Power supply PLC internal power supply 24VDC

5. Analog input (AI)specification

RTD Thermocou
Item Voltage input Current input
input Input
 RTD Thermocou
Item Voltage input Current input
input Input

S. K. T. E. J
Pt100. N. R. Wre3/
Pt1000. Wre5/26.
Input range -10V~+10V 0V~+10V 0V~+5V 1V~+5V 0~20mA 4~20mA
Cu50. 20]mV. [0
Cu100 50]mV. [0
100]mV

5mV 2.5mV 1.25mV 1.25mV 5uA 5uA 0.1℃ 0.1℃

Resolution

Input 6MΩ 250Ω 6MΩ 6MΩ

impedance

Maximum ±13V ±30mA ±5V

input range

Input LED light means normal ,dark means break OFF

indication

Response 560ms/4 Channel

time 5ms/4 Channel ,880ms/8 Channel

12 bits,Code range:0~32000(H series module 16 bits A/D 16 bits,Code

Digital input convert) range:0~32000
range

0.2% F.S 0.1% F.S

Precision

MPU use internal power supply, extend module use external power supply 24VDC ±10
Power 5VA
supply

Isolation Opto-electric isolation,Non-isolation between Channel ,between analog and digital is o

mode electricisolation

Power 24VDC
24VDC ±20%,100mA(maximum)
consumption ±20%,50mA(maximum

6. Analog output(AO)specification

Item Voltage output Current output

 Item Voltage output Current output

-10V~+10V 0V~ 0V~+5V 1V~+5V

Output range 0~20mA 4~20mA
+10V

5mV 2.5mV 1.25mV 1.25mV 5uA 5uA

Resolution

Output load 1KΩ@10V ≥500Ω@ 5V

≤500Ω
impedance

Output LED light means normal

indication

10mA
Drive
capabilit

Response 3ms
time

12 bits,Code range:0~32000(H series module 16 bits D/A

Digital output convert)
range

0.2% F.S
Precision

MPU use internal power supply, extend module use external

Power power supply 24VDC ±10% 5VA
supply

Opto-electric isolation,Non-isolation between Channel

Isolation ,between analog and digital is opto-electricisolation
mode

Power 24VDC ±20%,100mA(maximum)

consumption

Indicator declare
1. CPU indicator declare

1. POW:power indicator .green,constant light - power normal;Not light - Power abnormal.

2. RUN:Running indicator .green,constant light - PLC is running;Not light - PLC is stopping.

3. COM:communication indicator .green,flicker - communicating,flicker frequency signify the speed of the

communication;Not loght - No communication.

4. ERR:Erroe indicator .double(red. yellow),as follows:

ERR the state of the

Consult manage Signify information type
indicator

Normal Without error Not light

Normal,just prompt Yellow flicker:On 0.2

PLC have the component which seconds and Off 0.8
take attention to the
locked seconds
locked data

Yellow flicker:On 0.2

Modificate the PLC Problem in the soft seting ,permit user seconds and Off 0.8
hardward configure keep on operate the user program seconds

Check module
parallel bus (check
Communication abnormal between Yellow flicker:On 0.8
the RTC battery;
modul,auto dislodge the abnormal seconds and Off 0.2
check extension
module,permit user keep on operate seconds
module power
the user program
supply)

Upgrade the Fireware abnormal or user program Red slowly

fireware or modify abnormal,can not operate the user flicker:indicator light
the user program program 0.5s not light 0.5s

Hardware error,user program con not yellow constant light

Maintain
running

Note:the specific error code please check the system register SV3,error code corresponding the content

see detail the " system error code table".

2. Extend module ndicator declare

1. POW:power indicator .green,constant light -Power normal;Not light - Power error.

2. LINK:many state indicator .three colors(Red. Yellow. Green),as follow:

Module bus
Consult manage LINK the state of the indicator
state

Module no
Not light
communication

MPU
identification
the module but Green constant light
Normal have not
communication

Serial or
Green flicker:indicator light 30ms
parallel
not light 30ms
communicating

Without serial
Yellow flicker:indicator light 0.5s
or parallel
parallel power not light0.5s
communicate
supply not
enough,must
connect to external With serial or Yellow dark and shake
power supply parallel alternately:indicator not light 0.5s
communicate shark 0.5s

Without serial
Red flicker:indicator light 0.5s not
or parallel
Upgrade the light 0.5s
communicate
fireware
fail,reupgrade the
fireware of the With serial or Red dark and shake
module parallel alternately:indicator not dark 0.5s
communicate shark 0.5s

Without serial
or parallel Red constant light
communicate
Maintain
With serial or Red shark quickly:indicator light
parallel 30ms not light 30ms
communicate

Note:the specific error code please check the module parameter register CR15,error code

corresponding the content see detail the " CR parameter table".

 3. I/O indicator declare

I/O
Indicate
indicator the state of the indicator
information
type

Without signal Not light

Input
DI
With signalInput Constant light
Pulse signal Flicker(high frequency
input often bright)

Without signal
Not light
output

DO With signal
Constant light
output
Pulse signal Flicker(high frequency
output often bright)

Without signal
Not light
AI Input

With signal Input Constant light

Without signal
output (Channel Not light
AQ abnomal)

With signal
Constant light
output

I/O wiring diagram

1. Digital Input (DI) wiring diagram
2. Digital output (DO) wiring diagram

3. Analog input (AI) wiring diagram

4. Analog output (AQ) wiring diagram

5. Thermocouple Input wiring diagram

6. RTD Input wiring diagram

7. DS18B20, RW1820, DS1990 single or multiple sensor wiring diagram

 8. SHT1X or SHT7X sensor wiring diagram

PLC installation and precautions

[PLC installation]

PLC be installed,must be in closed switching box,installed any mode,PLC must can heat dissipation

well,prevent temperature build-up,the plc be sure not to installed near the bottom side. up side and in

vertical direction ,and keep space all around the PLC (as follows).

1. Rail mount :the rail specification :standard 35mm rail.

2. Screw mount :each MPU or extend module have two screw fix hole ,the diameter of the hole is

4.5mm,the position and distance please refer to the external dimension diagram.

3. Connect the extend module :extend module connect to the MPU by BUS,each extend module default

comes with a extend cable when ex-factory for connect to the last module .Connection method : open

tthe right expansion interface of the last module(MPU or extend module),insert the extend cable to the

expansion interface,reset the renovate after fast the extend cable,the right expansion interface of the

module for the next extend module.in this way connect all extend module.
 [ power supply and earth]

PLC power supply divide into AC and DC,pay attention to as follows when use:

1. AC supply Input voltage is 100~240VAC 50/60Hz,two line of the power supply (power line and zero

line) please connect to the L. N terminal blocks,please connect the power line (L) to the L terminal

,connect the zero line to the N terminal.

2. DC supply Input voltage is 24VDC -15%~+20%,the positive and negative of the power
supply connect +24V. 0V terminals.

3. if connect the AC110V or AC220V to +24V terminal or Input point terminals ,the PLC will be damaged

,please pay special attention to it.

4. Please connect the PLC to earth correctly ,the diameter of the line must be above 1.6mm.

[Matters need attention]

1. Please don't mount the PLC within dust . lamblack . electric conduction dust and corrosivity or

combustible gas .Please don't mount the PLC within the environment high temperature . moisture

condensation .

2. The machine is a OPEN TYPE enclosure ,so it must be used within the environment dustproof .

moistureproof . anti-corrosionbe . safe against electric shock and impact of external forces .Must have

safeguard procedures ( as: opened by special tools or key) prevent not maintenance personnel

operated or unexpected shock the machine, cause dangerous and damage.

3. When holemaking the screw hole and wiring ,don't drop-in the scrap iron or wire head to the machine,

potential trigger fire hazard . fault or malfunction.

4. There is a seal cover the aspirail of the PLC when ex-factory, use for prevent dust or foreign bodies

invaded, before wiring, don't wipe off, after wiring , before proceed power on the PLC, please evulsion

the seal cover, in order to heat dissipation very well. Otherwise potential trigger fire hazard. fault or

malfunction.
5. Please secure mount the connecting line and all kinds of the extend modules , bad contact potential

malfunction.

6. Keep 50mm space all around the PLC , and far away the high voltage line and large electric power to

the greatest extend.

Remote module
The section introduce the usage of PLC extend module use for

remote IO module

Overview
PLC extend module built-in a RS485 communication port , support

parallel bus ( use extend bus connect to parallel interface of PLC MPU )

also support serial bus( use RS485 communication port and

communication port of PLC MPU networking , master use

communication instruction control remote module ),when use serial bus

to expand (as remote IO module), expand don't limited by the system

points, may be distributed installation . This very important for a large

number of disperse digital or analog signal(temperature. humidity.

differential pressure. blowing rate. flow. fan rotate speed. valve open

degree etc. ) need be sampled and monitored in the system, easy

realize distributed installation moreover no expand point limited , vastly

improve control system configuration flexible and in the future expand

capacity, reduce wire and work load of all kinds of signal , meanwhile

reduce disturb because analog signal wire too long, save project invest

cost.
 Click menu [Tools/Remote module] or click tool bar button , open

" remote module " manage window. All control the remote module via the

window complete.

Module station number setting up

Via hardware 4 bit DIP switch setting up remote module station

number( also name station address. communication address). legal

station number is 1~254(0 is broadcast address).4 bit DIP may be

express decimal number 1~15( binary number from 0001 ~ 1111),

method of modify the station number via DIP switch as follow:

Up picture is the 4 bit DIP switch use to set the station number of the

module, above is ON, below is OFF, in the picture black part express the

switch position, the bit set side to ON express the bit is 1, set side to

OFF express the bit is 0, first bit in up picture is ON, other bits are OFF.

The first bit of the DIP switch express the 0 bit of binary(b0), the fourth

bit of the DIP switch express third bit of binary(b3),thus ,such as the DIP

switch in up picture express 0001,also decimal data is 1, express the

module station is 1( default is 1 when leave factory); If set the 1. 2 bits

to ON side, moreover others witch set to OFF side ,then be 0011, also

decimal data is 3, express module station number is 3.

If 4xbit DIP switch express the hardware address not enough to use or

there is no DIP switch of the module, may be use programming software

set the station number. after online with the module may be modify the

module station number in " Communication parameter " column

"Address", then click " Parameter download", change the module station

number.
 Note :If there is external DIP switch of the module, the address

set by switch will be granted (4 bit DIP switch may be set the

address range is 1~15);16 and above address or there is no DIP

switch of the module then the address be set by programming

software will be granted.

Online with module
Connect to one or more module on the network. Because the module

is RS485 communication, so must use RS232/485 converter convert the

computer RS232 communication port to RS485 then online the module.

After only online with the module succeed ,then may be control
the module on the network ,such as up down load . parameter.
online monitor etc. .

Click " remote module " window button , open " Online " window .

Set the related parameters , general condition use the default parameter

need not modify it.

 PC port number: select the computer serial port
communicate with the module. Useable COM serial port number in

the listing different according to the computer , system will automatic

search all useable COM serial port of the computer to user for select

by user .

Baud rate: select communication baud rate, system default is

19200.

Data format: select communication data format, system default

is "N,8,2 RTU".

Start address. end address: if communicate to single module,

use "Stand-alone search" option ; if communicate to many modules,

then "Start address" input the minimum station number of the

module, "End address" input the maximum station number of the

module.

Append to listing. cover listing: select the already online modules

use append or cover to the listing.

Stand-alone search: if communicate to single module, use

"Stand-alone search" option ; if communicate to many modules,

then must cancel "Stand-alone search" option moreover set "Start

address" and "End address".

Online operation

Online: direct click "Online" button, searched module (online

succeed) will be display in the listing.

Search: if forget about the baud rate etc. communication

parameters, may be click "Find" button to search, search function

will try all baud rate . all data format to communicate with the

module, so need spend longer time for waitting for search the

module, searched module (online succeed) will be display in the

listing.

Click "Exit", close "Online" window .

If online unsuccessful ,chances are below cause, look over to exclusion

the problem, if can not exclusion please connect the technical support .

A. Selected PC serial port not correct

B. Selected communication parameter and the communication

parameter of the module are different

C. Module power off

D. Communication cable connected wrong or not connected well

E. Use "USB convert to RS232 serial port data line" not correct installed

the driver

Parameter modify

After online succeed ,parameters of the module will be upload automatic,

as follow:
A. On the left side of the upper is module listing , here display the

already connected modules. May be double click any module in the

listing to select be current module, all online operation of the module as:

upload download parameter. firmware upgrade etc. only fro current

module, don't influence others module.

B. On the left side of the bottom is monitor zone , online monitoring use

for display current module real time data.

Righ side parameter of module different according to different module

type, major include signal type. use quantities. quantities upper lower

limit. sampling number of times. zero revise . filtering time etc.. Refer to

hardware manual "Extend module parameter".

User can modify the parameter arbitrarily, then via " parameter download

" button download to module.

Note :signal type selected must the same as signal type of

external sensor .

Parameter upload
Click button will upload and display the parameter of

current module at " remote module " window .

Parameter download
Click button will download the modified parameter to the

object module.
 Note :any parameter be modified, only take effect after via

"Parameter download" download to object module .There is not

execute "Parameter download" operation, parameters of object

module will be no change.

Firmware upgrade
Upgrade the firmware of the module, make the module support new

function.

Click button ,, open " firmware upgrade" window

Click " open " button , select the upgrade file according to the module.
Click "Upgrade" button ,upgrade the firmware of the module.

Note :If interrupt during upgrading because power of or other

reasons ,must rerun firmware upgrade until upgrade successful.

Online monitor

Click button enter into monitor status. Real time monitor input

channel data of current module , also may force change the output data

of the opu module .

Click button exit monitor status.
Appendix
List the resource of the system in PLC .

SM system status bit

SM system status bit is a group of special internal relay of the system,can be used unlimited in the

program, each SM has a special function.Do not use the SM which unlisted.

Power-
SM Function declare R/W off Default
preserve

SM0 On during running, Off during stopping R No 0

SM1 Off during running, On during stopping R No 0

On during the first scan when PLC starts RUN

SM2 R No 0
and then be Off

SM3 10ms clock pulse R No 0

SM4 100ms clock pulse R No 0

SM5 1s clock pulse R No 0

SM8 Scan time-out R No 0

SM9 PLC switch status R No 0

SM10 Run status R No 0

SM11 System failure R No 0

Hardware configure table mismatch the

SM12 R No 0
module

SM13 Battery in low voltage, malfunction or no R No 0

battery
SM14 Divide by zero flag R No 0

SM15 Data overflow flag R No 0

SM16 COM1 communicate error R No 0

SM17 COM2 communicate error R No 0

SM18 COM3 communicate error R No 0

SM19 COM4 communicate error R No 0

SM20 COM5 communicate error R No 0

HSC0 study enable control,0 is normal state,1

SM25 R/W No 0
is study state

SM26 HSC0 study confirm control R/W No 0

HSC0 reset control 0 is automatic reset 1 is

SM27 R/W No 0
not reset

HSC0 direction indication,0 is increase,1 is

SM30 R No 0
decrease

SM31 HSC0 error indication R No 0

HSC1 study enable control,0 is normal state,1

SM33 R/W No 0
is study state

SM34 HSC1 study confirm control R/W No 0

HSC1 reset control 0 is automatic reset 1 is

SM35 R/W No 0
not reset

HSC1 direction indication,0 is increase,1 is

SM38 R No 0
decrease
SM39 HSC1 error indication R No 0

HSC2 study enable control,0 is normal state,1

SM41 R/W No 0
is study state

SM42 HSC2 study confirm control R/W No 0

HSC2 reset control 0 is automatic reset 1 is

SM43 R/W No 0
not reset

HSC2 direction indication,0 is increase,1 is

SM46 R No 0
decrease

SM47 HSC2 error indication R No 0

HSC3 study enable control,0 is normal state,1

SM49 R/W No 0
is study state

SM50 HSC3 study confirm control R/W No 0

HSC3 reset control 0 is automatic reset 1 is

SM51 R/W No 0
not reset

HSC3 direction indication,0 is increase,1 is

SM54 R No 0
decrease

SM55 HSC3 error indication R No 0

HSC4 study enable control,0 is normal state,1

SM57 R/W No 0
is study state

SM58 HSC4 study confirm control R/W No 0

HSC4 reset control 0 is automatic reset 1 is

SM59 R/W No 0
not reset

HSC4 direction indication,0 is increase,1 is

SM62 R No 0
decrease

SM63 HSC4 error indication R No 0

 HSC5 study enable control,0 is normal state,1
SM65 R/W No 0
is study state

SM66 HSC5 study confirm control R/W No 0

HSC5 reset control 0 is automatic reset 1 is

SM67 R/W No 0
not reset

HSC5 direction indication,0 is increase,1 is

SM70 R No 0
decrease

SM71 HSC5 error indication R No 0

HSC6 study enable control,0 is normal state,1

SM73 R/W No 0
is study state

SM74 HSC6 study confirm control R/W No 0

HSC6 reset control 0 is automatic reset 1 is

SM75 R/W No 0
not reset

HSC6 direction indication,0 is increase,1 is

SM78 R No 0
decrease

SM79 HSC6 error indication R No 0

HSC7 study enable control,0 is normal state,1

SM81 R/W No 0
is study state

SM82 HSC7 study confirm control R/W No 0

HSC7 reset control 0 is automatic reset 1 is

SM83 R/W No 0
not reset

HSC7 direction indication,0 is increase,1 is

SM86 R No 0
decrease

SM87 HSC7 error indication R No 0

SM93 PLS0 prohibit the forward pulse R/W yes 0

SM94 PLS0 prohibit the reverse pulse R/W yes 0

SM95 PLS0 prohibit the brake function R/W yes 0

SM96 PLS0 pulse output indication R yes 0

PLS0 pulse output direction indication ,0 is

SM97 R yes 0
forward ,1 is reverse

SM98 PLS0 error flag R yes 0

PLS0 position model ,0 is relative address ,1

SM99 R/W yes 0
is absolute address

SM100 PLS0 pulse output complete R yes 0

SM109 PLS1 prohibit the forward pulse R/W yes 0

SM110 PLS1 prohibit the reverse pulse R/W yes 0

SM111 PLS1 prohibit the brake function R/W yes 0

SM112 PLS1 pulse output indication R yes 0

PLS1 pulse output direction indication ,0 is

SM113 R yes 0
forward ,1 is reverse

SM114 PLS1 error flag R yes 0

PLS1 position model ,0 is relative address ,1

SM115 R/W yes 0
is absolute address

SM116 PLS1 pulse output complete R yes 0

SM125 PLS2 prohibit the forward pulse R/W yes 0

SM126 PLS2 prohibit the reverse pulse R/W yes 0

SM127 PLS2 prohibit the brake function R/W yes 0

SM128 PLS2 pulse output indication R yes 0

PLS2 pulse output direction indication ,0 is

SM129 R yes 0
forward ,1 is reverse

SM130 PLS2 error flag R yes 0

PLS2 position model ,0 is relative address ,1

SM131 R/W yes 0
is absolute address

SM132 PLS2 pulse output complete R yes 0

SM141 PLS3 prohibit the forward pulse R/W yes 0

SM142 PLS3 prohibit the reverse pulse R/W yes 0

SM143 PLS3 prohibit the brake function R/W yes 0

SM144 PLS3 pulse output indication R yes 0

PLS3 pulse output direction indication ,0 is

SM145 R yes 0
forward ,1 is reverse

SM146 PLS3 error flag R yes 0

PLS3 position model ,0 is relative address ,1

SM147 R/W yes 0
is absolute address

SM148 PLS3 pulse output complete R yes 0

SM157 PLS4 prohibit the forward pulse R/W yes 0

SM158 PLS4 prohibit the reverse pulse R/W yes 0

SM159 PLS4 prohibit the brake function R/W yes 0

SM160 PLS4 pulse output indication R yes 0

PLS4 pulse output direction indication ,0 is

SM161 R yes 0
forward ,1 is reverse

SM162 PLS4 error flag R yes 0

PLS4 position model ,0 is relative address ,1

SM163 R/W yes 0
is absolute address

SM164 PLS4 pulse output complete R yes 0

SM173 PLS5 prohibit the forward pulse R/W yes 0

SM174 PLS5 prohibit the reverse pulse R/W yes 0

SM175 PLS5 prohibit the brake function R/W yes 0

SM176 PLS5 pulse output indication R yes 0

PLS5 pulse output direction indication ,0 is

SM177 R yes 0
forward ,1 is reverse

SM178 PLS5 error flag R yes 0

PLS5 position model ,0 is relative address ,1

SM179 R/W yes 0
is absolute address

SM180 PLS5 pulse output complete R yes 0

SM189 PLS6 prohibit the forward pulse R/W yes 0

SM190 PLS6 prohibit the reverse pulse R/W yes 0

SM191 PLS6 prohibit the brake function R/W yes 0

 SM192 PLS6 pulse output indication R yes 0

PLS6 pulse output direction indication ,0 is

SM193 R yes 0
forward ,1 is reverse

SM194 PLS6 error flag R yes 0

PLS6 position model ,0 is relative address ,1

SM195 R/W yes 0
is absolute address

SM196 PLS6 pulse output complete R yes 0

SM205 PLS7 prohibit the forward pulse R/W yes 0

SM206 PLS7 prohibit the reverse pulse R/W yes 0

SM207 PLS7 prohibit the brake function R/W yes 0

SM208 PLS7 pulse output indication R yes 0

PLS7 pulse output direction indication ,0 is

SM209 R yes 0
forward ,1 is reverse

SM210 PLS7 error flag R yes 0

PLS7 position model ,0 is relative address ,1

SM211 R/W yes 0
is absolute address

SM212 PLS7 pulse output complete R yes 0

Whether to match the station number during

SM216 Modbus TCP communication, 0 means R/W yes 0
mismatch, 1 means match.

SV system register
SV system register is a group of special internal register of the system,can be used unlimited in the

program, each SV has a special function.Do not use the SM which unlisted.
SV Function declare R/W Power- Default
off
preserve

SV0 The present scan time(unit 0.1ms) R No 0

SV1 The minimum scan time(unit 0.1ms) R No 0

SV2 The maximum scan time(unit 0.1ms) R No 0

System fault code,detail see the system

SV3 R No 0
fault code table

SV4 COM1 communicate error code R No 0

SV5 COM2 communicate error code R No 0

SV6 COM3 communicate error code R No 0

SV7 COM4 communicate error code R No 0

SV8 COM5 communicate error code R No 0

Modbus TCP client port settings, server

SV9 R/W yes 0
fixed 502

AI input on the CPU module break off

SV11 alarm every bit express one channel 0- R No 0
Normal 1-break off

SV12 Year R No 0

SV13 Month(1-12) R No 0

SV14 Day(1-31) R No 0

SV15 Hour(0-23) R No 0

SV16 Minute(0-59) R No 0
SV17 Second(0-59) R No 0

SV18 Week(1-7,Monday~Sunday) R No 0

SV19 PLC station's name R/W yes 0

SV20 PLC station's name R/W yes 0

SV21 PLC station's name R/W yes 0

SV22 PLC station's name R/W yes 0

SV23 PLC station's name R/W yes 0

SV24 PLC station's name R/W yes 0

SV25 Timer of program scan time-out(unit ms) R/W yes 200 ms

SV26 PLC address 1~254 R yes 1

Low byte is extend modules 0~31 High

SV27 R yes 0
byte is type

Low byte is CPU’s type High byte is

SV28 R yes 0
CPU’s version

Low byte is first extend module's code

SV29 R yes 0
High byte is first extend module's version

Low byte is second extend module's code

SV30 High byte is second extend module's R yes 0
version

Low byte is third extend module's code

SV31 R yes 0
High byte is third extend module's version

SV32 Low byte is fourth extend module's code R yes 0

High byte is fourth extend module's
 version

Low byte is fifth extend module's code

SV33 R yes 0
High byte is fifth extend module's version

Low byte is sixth extend module's code

SV34 R yes 0
High byte is sixth extend module's version

Low byte is seventh extend module's

SV35 code High byte is seventh extend R yes 0
module's version

Low byte is eighth extend module's code

SV36 High byte is eighth extend module's R yes 0
version

Low byte is ninth extend module's code

SV37 High byte is ninth extend module's R yes 0
version

Low byte is tenth extend module's code

SV38 High byte is tenth extend module's R yes 0
version

Low byte is eleventh extend module's

SV39 code High byte is eleventh extend R yes 0
module's version

Low byte is twelfth extend module's code

SV40 High byte is twelfth extend module's R yes 0
version

Low byte is thirteenth extend module's

SV41 code High byte is thirteenth extend R yes 0
module's version

Low byte is ffourteenth extend module's

SV42 code High byte is fourteenth extend R yes 0
module's version

SV43 Low byte is fifteenth extend module's R yes 0

code High byte is fifteenth extend
module's version
 COM1 communicate protocol:
Low 4 bit of low byte:0 - N,8, 2 For RTU
1 - E,8, 1 For RTU
2 - O 8, 1 For RTU
3 - N,7, 2 For ASCII
4 - E,7, 1 For ASCII
5 - O,7, 1 For ASCII
6 - N,8, 1 For RTU(H/N
0x30,19200,
SV44 serial support) R/W yes
N,8, 2 RTU
High 4 bit of low byte:0 - 2400
1 - 4800
2 - 9600
3 - 19200
4 - 38400
5 - 57600
6 - 115200(H/N serial
support)

COM1 and Ethernet communicate

SV45 R/W yes 200ms
overtime ,unit ms

COM2 communicate protocol,the same 0x30,19200,

SV46 R/W yes
as COM1 N,8, 2 RTU

SV47 COM2 communicate overtime ,unit ms R/W yes 200ms

SV48 PLC program size R yes 0

Low byte of system clock ,unit 16us Max

SV49 R yes
1073741824

High byte of system clock ,unit 16us Max

SV50 R yes
1073741824

COM3 communicate protocol,the same 0x30,19200,

SV54 R/W yes
as COM1 N,8, 2 RTU

SV55 COM3 communicate overtime ,unit ms R/W yes 200ms

COM4 communicate protocol,the same 0x30,19200,

SV56 R/W yes
as COM1 N,8, 2 RTU

SV57 COM4 communicate overtime ,unit ms R/W yes 200ms

SV58 COM5 communicate protocol,the same R/W yes 0x30,19200,
as COM1 N,8, 2 RTU

SV59 COM5 communicate overtime ,unit ms R/W yes 200ms

SV60 HSC0 current segment number R yes 0

SV61 HSC0 low word of current value R yes 0

SV62 HSC0 high word of current value R yes 0

SV63 HSC0 error code R yes 0

SV64 HSC1 current segment number R yes 0

SV65 HSC1 low word of current value R yes 0

SV66 HSC1 high word of current value R yes 0

SV67 HSC1 error code R yes 0

SV68 HSC2 current segment number R yes 0

SV69 HSC2 low word of current value R yes 0

SV70 HSC2 high word of current value R yes 0

SV71 HSC2 error code R yes 0

SV72 HSC3 current segment number R yes 0

SV73 HSC3 low word of current value R yes 0

SV74 HSC3 high word of current value R yes 0

SV75 HSC3 error code R yes 0

SV76 HSC4 current segment number R yes 0

SV77 HSC4 low word of current value R yes 0

SV78 HSC4 high word of current value R yes 0

SV79 HSC4 error code R yes 0

SV80 HSC5 current segment number R yes 0

SV81 HSC5 low word of current value R yes 0

SV82 HSC5 high word of current value R yes 0

SV83 HSC5 error code R yes 0

SV84 HSC6 current segment number R yes 0

SV85 HSC6 low word of current value R yes 0

SV86 HSC6 high word of current value R yes 0

SV87 HSC6 error code R yes 0

SV88 HSC7 current segment number R yes 0

SV89 HSC7 low word of current value R yes 0

SV90 HSC7 high word of current value R yes 0

SV91 HSC7 error code R yes 0

SV92 PLS0 current segment number R yes 0

SV93 PLS0 low word of pulse output number R yes 0

SV94 PLS0 high word of pulse output number R yes 0

SV95 PLS0 low word of current position R/W yes 0

SV96 PLS0 high word of current position R/W yes 0

SV97 PLS0 error code R yes 0

SV98 PLS1 current segment number R yes 0

SV99 PLS1 low word of pulse output number R yes 0

SV100 PLS1 high word of pulse output number R yes 0

SV101 PLS1 low word of current position R/W yes 0

SV102 PLS1 high word of current position R/W yes 0

SV103 PLS1 error code R yes 0

SV104 PLS2 current segment number R yes 0

SV105 PLS2 low word of pulse output number R yes 0

SV106 PLS2 high word of pulse output number R yes 0

SV107 PLS2 low word of current position R/W yes 0

SV108 PLS2 high word of current position R/W yes 0

SV109 PLS2 error code R yes 0

SV110 PLS3 current segment number R yes 0

SV111 PLS3 low word of pulse output number R yes 0

SV112 PLS3 high word of pulse output number R yes 0

SV113 PLS3 low word of current position R/W yes 0

SV114 PLS3 high word of current position R/W yes 0

SV115 PLS3 error code R yes 0

SV116 PLS4 current segment number R yes 0

SV117 PLS4 low word of pulse output number R yes 0

SV118 PLS4 high word of pulse output number R yes 0

SV119 PLS4 low word of current position R/W yes 0

SV120 PLS4 high word of current position R/W yes 0

SV121 PLS4 error code R yes 0

SV122 PLS5 current segment number R yes 0

SV123 PLS5 low word of pulse output number R yes 0

SV124 PLS5 high word of pulse output number R yes 0

SV125 PLS5 low word of current position R/W yes 0

SV126 PLS5 high word of current position R/W yes 0

SV127 PLS5 error code R yes 0

SV128 PLS6 current segment number R yes 0

SV129 PLS6 low word of pulse output number R yes 0

SV130 PLS6 high word of pulse output number R yes 0

SV131 PLS6 low word of current position R/W yes 0

SV132 PLS6 high word of current position R/W yes 0

SV133 PLS6 error code R yes 0

SV134 PLS7 current segment number R yes 0

SV135 PLS7 low word of pulse output number R yes 0

SV136 PLS7 high word of pulse output number R yes 0

SV137 PLS7 low word of current position R/W yes 0

SV138 PLS7 high word of current position R/W yes 0

SV139 PLS7 error code R yes 0

When value is -23206 prohibit all output

SV140 R/W yes 0
of Y

COM1 Communicate instruction execute

SV141 R/W yes 0
interval unit ms

SV142 The soft address of PLC(1~254) R yes 0

The setted address of the external DIP

SV143 R yes 0
switch

SV144 Low word of serial number R yes 0

SV145 High word of serial number R yes 0

Time of the direction output before the

SV146 R/W yes 5
pulse output(5~100us)

SV151 Number of locked data R yes 0

SV152 IP address,default : 192.168.1.111 RW yes 0x016F

SV153 IP address,default : 192.168.1.111 RW yes 0xC0A8

SV154 Subnet mask ,default: 255.255.255.0 R/W yes 0xFF00

SV155 Subnet mask ,default: 255.255.255.0 R/W yes 0xFFFF

PLS0 low word of mechanical original

SV156 R/W yes 0
point

PLS0 high word of mechanical original

SV157 R/W yes 0
point

PLS0 number of pulses to compensate

SV158 R/W yes 0
the reverse interval

PLS0 follow performance parameters,

SV159 R/W yes 50
range: 1~100

PLS1 low word of mechanical original

SV160 R/W yes 0
point

PLS1 high word of mechanical original

SV161 R/W yes 0
point

PLS1 number of pulses to compensate

SV162 R/W yes 0
the reverse interval

PLS1 follow performance parameters,

SV163 R/W yes 50
range: 1~100

PLS2 low word of mechanical original

SV164 R/W yes 0
point

PLS2 high word of mechanical original

SV165 R/W yes 0
point

PLS2 number of pulses to compensate

SV166 R/W yes 0
the reverse interval

SV167 PLS2 follow performance parameters, R/W yes 50

 range: 1~100

PLS3 low word of mechanical original

SV168 R/W yes 0
point

PLS3 high word of mechanical original

SV169 R/W yes 0
point

PLS3 number of pulses to compensate

SV170 R/W yes 0
the reverse interval

PLS3 follow performance parameters,

SV171 R/W yes 50
range: 1~100

PLS4 low word of mechanical original

SV172 R/W yes 0
point

PLS4 high word of mechanical original

SV173 R/W yes 0
point

PLS4 number of pulses to compensate

SV174 R/W yes 0
the reverse interval

PLS4 follow performance parameters,

SV175 R/W yes 50
range: 1~100

PLS5 low word of mechanical original

SV176 R/W yes 0
point

PLS5 high word of mechanical original

SV177 R/W yes 0
point

PLS5 number of pulses to compensate

SV178 R/W yes 0
the reverse interval

PLS5 follow performance parameters,

SV179 R/W yes 50
range: 1~100

PLS6 low word of mechanical original

SV180 R/W yes 0
point
SV181 PLS6 high word of mechanical original R/W yes 0
point

PLS6 number of pulses to compensate

SV182 R/W yes 0
the reverse interval

PLS6 follow performance parameters,

SV183 R/W yes 50
range: 1~100

PLS7 low word of mechanical original

SV184 R/W yes 0
point

PLS7 high word of mechanical original

SV185 R/W yes 0
point

PLS7 number of pulses to compensate

SV186 R/W yes 0
the reverse interval

PLS7 follow performance parameters,

SV187 R/W yes 50
range: 1~100

SV801 HSC0 low word of frequency R yes 0

SV802 HSC0 high word of frequency R yes 0

SV803 HSC1 low word of frequency R yes 0

SV804 HSC1 high word of frequency R yes 0

SV805 HSC2 low word of frequency R yes 0

SV806 HSC2 high word of frequency R yes 0

SV807 HSC3 low word of frequency R yes 0

SV808 HSC3 high word of frequency R yes 0

SV809 HSC4 low word of frequency R yes 0

SV810 HSC4 high word of frequency R yes 0

SV811 HSC5 low word of frequency R yes 0

SV812 HSC5 high word of frequency R yes 0

SV813 HSC6 low word of frequency R yes 0

SV814 HSC6 high word of frequency R yes 0

SV815 HSC7 low word of frequency R yes 0

SV816 HSC7 high word of frequency R yes 0

SV817 Historical fault code R yes 0

SV818 Historical fault code R yes 0

SV819 Historical fault code R yes 0

SV820 Historical fault code R yes 0

SV821 Historical fault code R yes 0

SV822 Historical fault code R yes 0

SV823 Historical fault code R yes 0

SV824 Historical fault code R yes 0

SV825 Historical fault code R yes 0

SV826 Historical fault code R yes 0

SV827 Historical fault code R yes 0

SV828 Historical fault code R yes 0

SV829 Historical fault code R yes 0

SV830 Historical fault code R yes 0

SV831 Historical fault code R yes 0

SV832 Historical fault code R yes 0

COM2 Communicate instruction execute

SV833 R/W yes 0
interval unit ms

COM3 Communicate instruction execute

SV834 R/W yes 0
interval unit ms

COM4 Communicate instruction execute

SV835 R/W yes 0
interval unit ms

COM5 Communicate instruction execute

SV836 R/W yes 0
interval unit ms

SV840 System status error code R yes 0

SV841 System status error code R yes 0

CPU firmware version date (low byte for

SV842 R yes 0
year, high byte for month)

CPU firmware version date (low byte for

SV843 R yes 0
day, high byte for hour)

FPGA firmware version date (low byte for

SV844 R yes 0
year, high byte for month)

FPGA firmware version date (low byte for

SV845 R yes 0
day, high byte for hour)

SV846 Gateway address (default :192.168.1.1) R/W yes 0x0101

 SV847 Gateway address (default :192.168.1.1) R/W yes 0xC0A8

SV848 MAC address R yes 0

SV849 MAC address R yes 0

SV850 MAC address R yes 0

COM1 Communication port timeout

SV851 exception in receiving characters( in R/W yes 0
milliseconds)

COM2 Communication port timeout

SV852 exception in receiving characters( in R/W yes 0
milliseconds)

COM3 Communication port timeout

SV853 exception in receiving characters( in R/W yes 0
milliseconds)

COM4 Communication port timeout

SV854 exception in receiving characters( in R/W yes 0
milliseconds)

COM5 Communication port timeout

SV855 exception in receiving characters( in R/W yes 0
milliseconds)

SV864 Lora network packet ID R/W yes 1

Syetem interruption table

PLCsupport 52 system interruptions,include pulse output. edge catch. high speed counter and timed

interruption.

Interruption Priority
Interruption type
No. Declare level

1 Pulse output
PLS0 pulse output start
interruption
Hight to low
2
PLS0 pulse output complete
 (the small
Interruption interruption
Priority
Interruption type no.level
priority
No. Declare
the big
interruption
no.)
3
PLS1 pulse output start

4
PLS1 pulse output complete

5 PLS2 pulse output start

6
PLS2 pulse output complete

7
PLS3 pulse output start

8
PLS3 pulse output complete

9
PLS4 pulse output start

10
PLS4 pulse output complete

11
PLS5 pulse output start

12
PLS5 pulse output complete

13
PLS6 pulse output start

14
PLS6 pulse output complete

15
PLS7 pulse output start

16
PLS7 pulse output complete

17 Edge catch
X0 rise edge catch
interruption

18
X1 rise edge catch

19
X2 rise edge catch

20 X3 rise edge catch

21
X4 rise edge catch

22
X5 rise edge catch

23
X6 rise edge catch
Interruption Priority
Interruption type
No. Declare level

24
X7 rise edge catch

25 X0 drop edge catch

26
X1 drop edge catch

27
X2 drop edge catch

28
X3 drop edge catch

29
X4 drop edge catch

30
X5 drop edge catch

31
X6 drop edge catch

32
X7 drop edge catch

33 High speed counter HSC0 current value=preset value(each

interruption segment preset be generated)

34 HSC0 input direction changed

HSC1 current value=preset value(each

35
segment preset be generated)

36 HSC1 input direction changed

37 HSC2 current value=preset value(each

segment preset be generated)

38
HSC2 input direction changed

39 HSC3 current value=preset value(each

segment preset be generated)

40
HSC3 input direction changed

41 HSC4 current value=preset value(each

segment preset be generated)

42
HSC4 input direction changed

43 HSC5 current value=preset value(each

segment preset be generated)

44
HSC5 input direction changed
 Interruption Priority
Interruption type
No. Declare level

45 HSC6 current value=preset value(each

segment preset be generated)

46
HSC6 input direction changed

47 HSC7 current value=preset value(each

segment preset be generated)

48
HSC7 input direction changed

49 T252 timer reaches target

50
T253 timer reaches target
Timed interruption

51
T254 timer reaches target

52 T255 timer reaches target

Communication address code table

1. PLC bit component table(equivalently Modbus address type 0. 1,support Modbus function code 1.
2. 5. 15)

Modbus communication
Component Name Component range Read/Write address code Declare
Hexadecimal Decimal

X0~X1023 0x0000~0x03FF 0~1023

X External input R

Y0~Y1023 0x0600~0x09FF 1536~2559

Y External output R/W

M0~M12287 0x0C00~0x3BFF 3072~15359

M Auxiliary relay R/W

Timer(output coil) T0~T1023 0x3C00~0x3FFF 15360~16383

T R/W

Counter(output coil) C0~C255 0x4000~0x40FF 16384~16639

C R/W

SM0~SM215 0x4200~0x42D7 16896~17111

SM System status bit R/W

S0~S2047 0x7000~0x77FF 28672~30719

S Step relay R/W

2. PLC component table(equivalently Modbus address type 3. 4,sepport Modbus function code 3. 4. 6.
16)

Component Name Component range Read/Write Modbus commucation address Declare

code
 Component Name Component range Read/Write Modbus commucation
Hexadecimal address
Decimal Declare
code

Extend module Use Modbus protocol to a

CR CR0~CR255 R/W 0x00~0xFF
Hexadecimal 0~255
Decimal
parameter extend module

AI Analog input register AI0~AI255 R 0x0000~0x00FF 0~255

AQ Analog output register AQ0~AQ255 0x0100~0x01FF 256~511

R/W

V Internal data register V0~V14847 0x0200~0x3BFF 512~15359

R/W

TV Timer(current value ) TV0~TV1023 0x3C00~0x3FFF 15360~16383

R/W

16 bit register,among CV4

CV Counter(current value ) CV0~CV255 0x4000~0x40FF 16384~16639
R/W 32 bit register

System special
SV SV0~SV900 R/W 0x4400~0x4784 17408~18308
register

3. Declare:

1. PLC use the standard Modbus protocol(support RTU and ASCII mode),can communicate to HMI

and configuration soft which support Modbus protocol

2. PLC's Modbus addressing number from 0,Some HMI or onfiguration soft from 1,if HMI or

onfiguration soft modbus addressing from 0 then couumnicate direct,e.g. M0 is 0x3072,V0 is

4x0512;if HMI or onfiguration soft modbus addressing from 1 then the address must add

1,e.g.M0 is 0x3073[3072+1],V0 is 4x0513[512+1].The first place address is the Modbus protocol

component type(0/1 is bit relay ,3/4 is word register , 0/4 can read and write,1/3 read only)other

places are the component address.

Error code table

1. System error code table:

Error category Descrip on

A Hardware failure, user program not runnable, needs to return to factory repair, red indicator light keeps on

Firmware excep on or user program excep on, user program not runnable, red indicator light will be on 0.5
B
seconds and be off 0.5 seconds

C Communica on excep on between the modules, automa cally remove the module with excep on, yellow
indicator light will be on 0.8 seconds and be off 0.2 seconds
 Incorrect so ware setup, allow the user program to con nu, yellow indicator light will be on 0.2 seconds and
D
be off 0.8 seconds

Indicator
Error Code Message indicated Error category Indicator effect
color

0 System normal

On 0.5 seconds and Off 0.5

1 CPU firmware incomplete B Red
seconds

2 CPU memory 1 access exception A Red Keep on

3 CPU memory 2 access exception A Red Keep on

4 RTC access exception A Red Keep on

5 CPU I/O access exception A Red Keep on

6 CPU memory 3 access exception A Red Keep on

7 I/O board access exception A Red Keep on

8 Enhanced bus working abnormally A Red Keep on

On 0.5 seconds and Off 0.5

59 Slave CPU firmware incomplete B Red
seconds

On 0.5 seconds and Off 0.5

60 1# expand module firmware incomplete B Red
seconds

On 0.5 seconds and Off 0.5

61 2# expand module firmware incomplete B Red
seconds

On 0.5 seconds and Off 0.5

62 3# expand module firmware incomplete B Red
seconds

On 0.5 seconds and Off 0.5

63 4# expand module firmware incomplete B Red
seconds

On 0.5 seconds and Off 0.5

64 5# expand module firmware incomplete B Red
seconds
 Indicator
Error Code Message indicated Error category Indicator effect
color

On 0.5 seconds and Off 0.5

65 6# expand module firmware incomplete B Red
seconds

On 0.5 seconds and Off 0.5

66 7# expand module firmware incomplete B Red
seconds

On 0.5 seconds and Off 0.5

67 8# expand module firmware incomplete B Red
seconds

On 0.5 seconds and Off 0.5

68 9# expand module firmware incomplete B Red
seconds

On 0.5 seconds and Off 0.5

69 10# expand module firmware incomplete B Red
seconds

On 0.5 seconds and Off 0.5

70 11# expand module firmware incomplete B Red
seconds

On 0.5 seconds and Off 0.5

71 12# expand module firmware incomplete B Red
seconds

On 0.5 seconds and Off 0.5

72 13# expand module firmware incomplete B Red
seconds

On 0.5 seconds and Off 0.5

73 14# expand module firmware incomplete B Red
seconds

On 0.5 seconds and Off 0.5

74 15# expand module firmware incomplete B Red
seconds

On 0.5 seconds and Off 0.5

75 Expand module hardware failure B Red
seconds

On 0.5 seconds and Off 0.5

87 Illegal table content B Red
seconds

On 0.5 seconds and Off 0.5

88 Out of program stack space B Red
seconds

On 0.5 seconds and Off 0.5

89 Programming software version is too low B Red
seconds

On 0.5 seconds and Off 0.5

90 User program corrupted B Red
seconds

On 0.5 seconds and Off 0.5

91 Step component exceed range B Red
seconds
 Indicator
Error Code Message indicated Error category Indicator effect
color

On 0.5 seconds and Off 0.5

92 Step combine exceed range B Red
seconds

On 0.5 seconds and Off 0.5

93 The table record number is beyond range B Red
seconds

On 0.5 seconds and Off 0.5

94 Catch edge times exceed range B Red
seconds

Configuration data is illegal when power supply On 0.5 seconds and Off 0.5
95 B Red
drop seconds

On 0.5 seconds and Off 0.5

96 Function code illegal B Red
seconds

On 0.5 seconds and Off 0.5

97 Operand illegal B Red
seconds

Number of instructions for the same sort out of On 0.5 seconds and Off 0.5
98 B Red
scope seconds

On 0.5 seconds and Off 0.5

99 No end instruction B Red
seconds

On 0.8 seconds and Off 0.2

100 Access 1# expand module I/O fails C Yellow
seconds

On 0.8 seconds and Off 0.2

101 Access 2# expand module I/O fails C Yellow
seconds

On 0.8 seconds and Off 0.2

102 Access 3# expand module I/O fails C Yellow
seconds

On 0.8 seconds and Off 0.2

103 Access 4# expand module I/O fails C Yellow
seconds

On 0.8 seconds and Off 0.2

104 Access 5# expand module I/O fails C Yellow
seconds

On 0.8 seconds and Off 0.2

105 Access 6# expand module I/O fails C Yellow
seconds

On 0.8 seconds and Off 0.2

106 Access 7# expand module I/O fails C Yellow
seconds

On 0.8 seconds and Off 0.2

107 Access 8# expand module I/O fails C Yellow
seconds
 Indicator
Error Code Message indicated Error category Indicator effect
color

On 0.8 seconds and Off 0.2

108 Access 9# expand module I/O fails C Yellow
seconds

On 0.8 seconds and Off 0.2

109 Access 10# expand module I/O fails C Yellow
seconds

On 0.8 seconds and Off 0.2

110 Access 11# expand module I/O fails C Yellow
seconds

On 0.8 seconds and Off 0.2

111 Access 12# expand module I/O fails C Yellow
seconds

On 0.8 seconds and Off 0.2

112 Access 13# expand module I/O fails C Yellow
seconds

On 0.8 seconds and Off 0.2

113 Access 14# expand module I/O fails C Yellow
seconds

On 0.8 seconds and Off 0.2

114 Access 15# expand module I/O fails C Yellow
seconds

On 0.8 seconds and Off 0.2

131 RTC battery failure C Yellow
seconds

On 0.8 seconds and Off 0.2

132 Extension module power supply failure C Yellow
seconds

Storage program and running program On 0.8 seconds and Off 0.2
133 C Yellow
inconsistent seconds

On 0.2 seconds and Off 0.8

140 Hardware configuration incompatible D Yellow
seconds

On 0.5 seconds and Off 0.5

141 Scan timeout watchdog operate B Red
seconds

On 0.2 seconds and Off 0.8

142 Have locked datas D Yellow
seconds

On 0.2 seconds and Off 0.8

143 Current running step tasks is above upper limit D Yellow
seconds

2. Communication error code table:

Error code Declare

 Error code Declare

Normal
0

Function Code Error

1

Data Address Error

2

Data Value Error

3

Communication message too short or too long

4

Include not ASCII characters

5

Slave PLC receive message overtime

6

No end character
7

Write data information is too long or too short

8

Check Code Error

9

Application of resources are occupied

10

The firmware does not match with the hardware

11

Program capacity overrun, writing is prohibited

12

Programming cable wiring diagram

PC(RS232) PLC(COM1)

DB9 female 4 line S male